Home

KYOCERA FS FS-C2526MFP

1. e Click the item you want to know about and press the F1 key on your keyboard 5 5 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Printing Data Saved on the Printer Print data can be saved in the machine s Job Box and printed when needed Private Print Private Print stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print Refer to the Printer Driver Operation Guide on how to print a job as Private Print using the printer driver NOTE RAM disk mode must be enabled For details refer to RAM Disk Setting on page 9 23 X 1 Display the screen Document Box Removable Memory Sub Address Box GB0051_00 Proof and Hold GB0650_00 2 Select the creator of the document to print 10 10 Cancel lt Back GB0651_00 t 3 Select the document im Vi 3 doc 4100908135138 com l _ 2jdoc 0100908134821 10 10 1 1 m J Cancel GB0653_01 Displays details for individual documents 5 6 _ EE e Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer 4 Print and delete the document To print the document 1 10 10 ti Vi FS doc 4100908135138 cm _ Sjdoc 0100908134821 am 1 1 Lad Lal NOTE The password entry screen will be displayed Enter the password using the numeric keys GB0653_01 10 10 1 999 2 Cancel 04 e Specify the numbe
2. gt m ee r Combine gpa Collate On 4 GBO0001_01 O 0 com Color Balance hme Off j Sharpness 0 GB0002_01 Add Edi z _ Shortcut j Use V or AN to scroll up and down Preface gt About this Operation Guide Originals and Paper Sizes This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes Icons on the Touch Panel The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel Originals Horizontal direction Vertical direction 1 15 Preface gt About this Operation Guide 1 16 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the following topics BML PA VS Se cht ct at cee att cee ecg gate dt tc cere Pd te emg ae cet ce ceeds E 2 2 DNV NNN sect cease eect bate eect pieces E dn sete ae eee tai eeu ta emus ecto esnaee ces 2 2 SAO PAIS eter censdicartauiersinsttrtsettacrstientvaaqiandenueioeincatncierecabersbaroeinngeiavennsitesdae coasted ociue neta wena maeeemitetaceantines 2 6 TOUS WINS ceca E E E donde senateeadeanee 2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables ccccccccceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseueeseeeeseeeeseeeseeeesanees 2 8 Connection gt lt 1A enna ee en nn a ee ee 2 8 Preparing Necessary Cables c cccccescccssccceececesecceueeccsecesseeeneucesseeeseusessueeseueesegeessseeesaeeecueesenseesseesens 2 9 C
3. Cancel GB0749_00 GB0750_00 Displays details for individual shortcuts 9 41 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Editing and Deleting Users User properties can be changed and users can be deleted 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 33 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Lacal Authenticatian Simple login settings Local User Authorization GB0435_00 2 Edit or delete a user To edit a user 1 Press for the user whose settings you wish to edit 10 10 Q Searches by user name A A 2 Admin Admin a F a DeviceAdmin 2600 2 User A User A GB0440_01 me e 2 Editthe user For more information about individual settings refer to Adding a User on page 9 36 N User Name System Menu Counter 10 10 2 User Name User A Login User Name Input Limit 32 ABC Lv REJ Login Password FORO Account Name Others Cancel Save GB0441_00 GB0057_54 Login User Name 10 10 Input 6 2 Limit64 User Name User af Login User Name User A 1 2 Login Password OOK Account Name Others l d GB0441_00 GB0057_28 9 42 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Login Password 10 10 2 User Name User A Login User Name User af Input 3 Limit 64 Login Password EK
4. GB0641_00 GB0642_00 3 Select the chart to be corrected 10 10 Cancel GB0643_00 4 Press or to enter the values read from the chart 10 10 I A 0 9 GB0644_00 l d Press to increase the value from 0 to 9 To decrease press By pressing the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters going from A to I To move in the reverse direction press You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registration values for each chart 6 Press Start after all values have been entered Color registration begins System Menu Counter 10 10 Cancel GB0643_00 7 Press OK after color registration is complete Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Detailed Settings 4 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down System Menu Counter 10510 lt gt System Menu Counter Ere AN Eg pate Timer 2 e 5 1 System Menu Counter 10 10 Correcting Black Line GB0054_04 Display Brightness 3 Color Registration Tone Curve i guictoa on System Menu Counter GB0629_01 GB0641_00 2 Print the chart Registration GB0642_01 A chart is printed On the chart for each of M magenta C cyan and Y yellow charts for H 1 to 9 and V 1 to 5 are printed 9 29 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Chart Example
5. GB0001_01 GB0002_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left GB0036_00 Select the original orientation G 3 36 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Duplex USB Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original Set when using a 1 sided sheet original N Set when using a 2 sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or right Other 1 sided Set when using a 1 sided sheet original Settings 2 sided Binding Left Set when using a 2 sided sheet original that will be bound on the left or Right right 2 sided Binding Top Set when using a 2 sided sheet original that will be bound at the top Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction This function is displayed when 2 sided Binding Left Right or 2 sided Binding Top is selected 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen Send Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Dest 0 Recall Check File Format Original Size One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book me q Original Orientation Yee a a Ton Fdae on eft Se A ac Duplex E mail Folder FAX Vv amp 1 sided Vv GB0055_00 GB0081_00 Close Add Edit Shortcu Use V or AN to scr
6. e GB0019_00 lt 1O e a oO Copying gt Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing Use this function for test copies or any other occasion when high quality print is not required 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies 1 lie 2 at AN t Paper Ba Zoom Al Density O Off Selection xa Hue Adjustment A4 100 Normal 0 rem 0 2 4 D n p r gt c Color Balance 13 i Le Yams Off a Duplex E Combine gp Collate Boone 0 Functions uel 1 sided3 gt 1 sided Off On Close Add Edi y Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0001_01 GB0002_01 2 Select the function Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 B l o GB0045_00 4 13 Copying gt Copying Functions Hue Adjustment Adjust the color hue of images Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow red or yellow to a strong green yellow to make more creative copies Adjust yellow to more green adjust blue to more magenta NOTE Original Addii This feature is used with full color and auto color copying These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images 1 Display the screen Ah Adjust yellowish red to more yellow adjust bluish cyan to
7. Printer driver print settings screen The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print related settings For more information refer to the Printer Driver Operation Guide on the DVD Properties Basic Layout Imaging Publishing Job Advanced Paper r Print size Media type 2 os a4 100 Unspecified Source Destination Auto source selection Printer default Page Sizes Orientation Portrait __ Print on both sides Landscape I Flip on long edge i ll L Rotated Flip on short edge Full color D Black amp White EcoPrint V Collate eset Print preview 2 R Co KYOCER Description Quick Print Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions Each time you click an icon it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings il i iF Orientation Color Mode Collate Print on both Multiple pages sides per sheet Basic This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used You can use it to configure the paper size destination duplex printing and color mode Layout This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts including booklet printing combine mode poster printing and scaling Imaging This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality and
8. cccceccceeeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseees 6 6 Creating a Shared Folder cccccccssccseecseeeceecceeeceeeceeccaeeceesaueeseeesseeseeseeeeseeesagess 6 7 Checking Me IP QUA ccs sense tac cevenssceidendescuixecectstucamseerebenssdeicvessctecuchOasenaadiaecsdecearaneeeas 6 10 Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 cccccecccceeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaaees 6 11 SDECIIVING Destination ssiri a e A NEgi 6 15 Choosing from the Address BOOK cccccccceccceeceeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeae esse eeseeeseeeseueeseeeaeeeees 6 15 Choosing by One Touch Key ccccccccseccceccceeeceeecaeecceeesaeecenecaueeseeeaueesaeecseessaeeeas 6 17 Entering a New E mail AddresS ccc ccecccecccceeeceeeceeseeeeeseeeseeesaeeseceseuesenesaneeaeeeees 6 18 Specifying a New PC Folder cece ccccceccceeeceeeeceeeceeeceeeceueecueesauecaueesueesaeecseessueeaas 6 19 Checking and Editing Destinations ccc ecccecccecece cece ceca eeeeeeseeesaeeseueeseeeseeeseeeees 6 22 sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending cccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 23 Registering Destinations in the Address BOOK cccccceccceecceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeesaeeeaeeeas 6 24 7 e o ele pro ik 70 g 6 aueeenee ene E eee eee nee enn tener oer ene eee 6 24 AGNO ROU seii sais ese E AA 6 28 Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries cccccccecccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeeaeeeeas 6 31 Adding a D
9. Duplex page 4 7 Combine page 4 70 Collate page 3 42 Functions Original Size page 3 35 Original Orientation page 3 36 Color Selection page 3 57 Original Image page 3 45 EcoPrint page 4 73 Hue Adjustment page 4 74 Color Balance page 4 75 Sharpness page 3 46 Background Density Adj page 3 47 Saturation page 4 76 Continuous Scan page 3 39 Job Finish Notice page 3 52 File Name Entry page 3 54 Priority Override page 3 55 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 25 Send One Touch Key page 6 17 Address Book page 6 15 Ext Address Book refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide E mail page 6 78 Folder page 6 79 FAX refer to Fax Operation Guide WSD Scan page 6 42 Functions File Format page 3 49 Original Size page 3 35 Original Orientation page 3 36 Duplex page 3 37 Sending Size page 6 37 File Separation page 6 39 Scan Resolution page 3 44 Density page 3 43 Color Selection page 3 57 Original Image page 3 45 Sharpness page 3 46 Background Density Adj page 3 47 FAX TX Resolution refer to Fax Operation Guide Zoom page 3 48 Continuous Scan page 3 39 File Name Entry page 3 54 E mail Subject Body page 6 40 Job Finish Notice page 3 52 FTP Encryp
10. IQ N t Paper S Zoom ll Density o off Selection j a xa Hue Adjustment A4 100 Normal 0 rem 0 a O gt c Color Balance _ Duplex rs Combine g Collate La 2 _ Sh L Se arpness Close Add Edi Shortcut GB0001_01 GB0002_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Adjust the sharpness Ready to copy Full Color GB0060_00 a el Press 3 to 3 Blur Sharpen to adjust the sharpness 3 46 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Background Density Adjust Remove dark background from originals such aS newspapers ao Off Do not use this function Auto Adjusts the density automatically based on the original Manual Manually adjust the density Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Background Density Adj Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies es aaan Background Density Adj Paper A Zoom d Density a Sn a Selection zi ral Saturation A40 100 Normal 0 0 mi 3 4 es ee Mre gg Continuous Scan eS Duplex Combine gp Collate tv7 4 Yo io Job Finish Notice 1 sidedS gt 1 sided Off On of YV Functions GB0001_01 GB0002_02 Close Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down Adjusts the background density Au
11. NOTE Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A4 A5 B5 Folio Letter Legal Statement Oficio Il and 16K When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order Copying gt Copying Functions 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 c Copies 1 i Paper Selection A Zoom H Density Normal 0 r 7 Collate _ 4 1 sided gt gt 1 sided On GBO0001_01 2 Select the function 2 in 1 or 4 in 1 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 gt Others g d oO Others 1 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Bel GZ 2in1 4in1 Others v o a 2 Select the desired Combine option 10 10 10 10 Combine j 2 uams YE 2in1 Lto R T to B GB0016_00 SE 2 in 1 R to L B to T 2 4 in 1 Right then Down Cancel GB0017_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0018_00 Copying gt Copying Functions 3 Sets the boundary line type 10 10 Original Orientation Top Edge on Left 4 Select the original orientation 10 10 nn d 4 12 GB0017_01 GB0017_01 2 Ready to copy Full Color LI Solid Line Dotted Line 5 Positioning Mark Ag Top Edge on Top Ea Top Edge on Left l
12. Paper Saving Copy Cancel GB0779_00 GB0782_00 3 L Da Select the favorite you wish to delete 3 22 Common Operations gt Favorites Using Favorites Call up settings from a favorite 1 Display the screen Favorites Application 2 Select a favorite Select the function 10 10 PF _ _ Ey oF I a ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC Addre ss Entry Scan to PC Addre Scan to E mail A Scan to E mail A SS Book _ddress Entry J ddress Book Menu Application When using the wizard mode GB0056_00 1 The registered screens are displayed in order Make the desired settings Set Combine 10 10 8 oO gt as i B Adjust the density 10 10 S 2in1 E i T a Lighter Normal Darker Inputd Others E 3 A Limit 128 a EEE 2 mD a et lt c e e GB0057_99 2 Confirm the settings and start the job 10 10 Use V or A to scroll up and own Density Normal 0 J GB0820_00 NOTE To edit the settings press lt Back and make changes as desired Common Operations gt Favorites When using the program mode Select a favorite to call up registered settings Press the Start key to start the job Start 3 24 Common Operations gt Shortcuts Shortcuts Frequently used function screens can be registered as shortcuts so that they can be called up eas
13. 2 Connect the machine 1 Connect the USB cable to the appropriate interface located on the right side of the body 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC Connecting the Power Cable 4 Remove the Power Cord Connector Cover Preparation before Use gt Connecting Cables 2 Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet Q IMPORTANT Only use the power cable that comes with the machine 3 Replace the Power Cord Connector Cover 2 12 Preparation before Use gt Power On Off Power On Off Power On Power Off When the main mcu indicator is lit Recovery from sleep i Main Power indicator Sos Soo K OF een Y Press the Power key When the main power indicator is off Turn the main power switch on Q IMPORTANT When turning off the main power switch do not turn on the main power switch again immediately Wait more than 5 seconds and then turn on the main power switch When not Ls off the main power switch sleep Ss Main Power indicator BA 206 T Disa Y Press the Power key The Power key light will go out and the Main Power indicator will light up 2 13 Preparation before Use gt Power On Off When turning off the main power switch Note that when the main power switch is turned off the machine will be unable to automatically receive print data from computers or faxe
14. After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Enhanced WSD Description Enhanced WSD Set whether to use Kyocera s proprietary web services Selecting Off will disable the functionality of WIA and TWAIN drivers If you want to disable KMnhnet Viewer functionality Enhanced WSD Enhanced WSD SSL SNMP and SNMPv3 refer to Protocol Detail on page 9 20 must be set to Off Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Enhanced WSD SSL Item Description Enhanced WSD SSL Set whether to use Kyocera s proprietary web services over SSL Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON 9 21 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu IPSec Item Description Make this setting when you use PSec Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Secure Protocol Description SSL Select whether or not to use SSL Value Off On IPP Security Select the IPP security level This setup is available when SSL is On Value IPP IPP over SSL IPPoverSSL only HTTP Security Select the HTTP security level This setup is available when SSL is On Value HTTP HTTPS HTTPS Only LDAP Security Ext Address Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employ
15. Others Cancel GB0082_00 2 Select the file format Ready to send 10 10 File Format image Quality GB0698_00 3 Set the image quality 10 10 PDF GB0698_00 4 Set PDF A 10 10 File Format GB0698_00 3 50 Ready to send TIE TIFF JPEG XPS Cancel 10 10 F 1 1 o Ready to send el 10 10 GB0145_00 GB0083_00 GB0699_00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Color Selection Select the color mode setting Auto Color document Scan to Print from USB USB Automatically recognizes whether a document is color or black and white and then scans the Auto Color Gray Automatically detects whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale Auto Color B amp W Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White Full Color Scan document in full color Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish Black amp White kk 1 2 This function is displayed while copying or printing This function is displayed while sending or storing Display the screen Scan document in black and white File size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale 1 R
16. The following paper sizes are supported A4 A5 A6 B5 Legal Letter Other Folio Oficio Il Executive Statement 16K and Envelope C5 NOTE You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating Such paper may cause paper jams or other faults For clearer and brighter color copies use the special color paper When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Media Type on page 9 7 The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 163 g m If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 4 Adjust the cassette size 1 Q IMPORTANT When pulling the cassette out of the machine ensure it is supported and does not fall out 2 Adjust the cassette size to reflect the size of paper being loaded Paper sizes are marked on the cassette 3 3 Common Operations gt Loading Paper 2 Turn the paper size dial to the size of the paper Q IMPORTANT To use a paper size that does not appear on the size dial set the size dial to Other The paper size must also be set from the operation panel For details see Quick Setup Wizard on page 3 29 3 Load paper Q IMPORTANT Load the paper with the print side facing up Before loading the paper be
17. e fc wo 3 m 0 a Press lt or gt on each side of the color to be adjusted Cyan Magenta Yellow Black to adjust each color el Copying gt Copying Functions Saturation Adjust the color saturation of the image Grayish Original Vivid AA A A AMAAAAAASDA A A Fa Results in paler color Results in more vivid color NOTE This feature is used with full color and auto color copying 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy Full Color lead An Background Density Adj y Continuous Scan Ga Close GB0001_01 off Job Finish Notice 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 il Saturation 0 2 Add Edi Shortcut GB0002_02 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function S Cancel ESR ok Press 3 or 3 Grayish Vivid to adjust the color saturation 4 16 5 Printing This chapter explains the following topics FAnn TOMADI AUONS 2 oiia E E E EE E EE a 5 2 Printing Data Saved on the Printer ccccccccccseeccceseeeceeseecsseeceeeecseueeeseaeecsueeecsueeeesaueeesueesssaueeessuseesseneeesanees 5 6 PEVAR INT oera a E E E A EE E E E 5 6 FOOT eA FOR aegre a E EE EEE E EE EE E E E EE 5 8 Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeesaeeeessaeeeeseeeees 5 11 5 1 Printing
18. 2 24 Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings e Login user name and login password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domain a2 name e Path e Folder share permissions of the recipient 6 20 1103 Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings e Login user name and login password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name e Path e Folder share permissions of the recipient 6 20 Failed to send via FTP Check the FTP settings e Path e Folder share permissions of the recipient 6 20 1104 Failed to send the e mail Check the e mail address NOTE If the address is rejected by the domain you cannot send the e mail 6 18 1105 Failed to send via SMB Select On of the SMB settings on the COMMAND CENTER Failed to send the e mail Select On of the SMTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER Failed to send via FTP Select On of the FTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER 2 24 1106 Failed to send the e mail Check the sender address of SMTP on the COMMAND CENTER 2 24 1131 Failed to send via FTP Select On of the secure protocol settings on the COMMAND CENTER 10 19 2 24 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Corrective Actions Reference Page 1132 Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP server 2 24 e
19. Ready to print from Box 10 10 A JPEG TIFF Print dpi Paper Size A XPS Fit to Page off Add Edi Shortcut GB0099_01 GB0097_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0102_00 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Storing Size Select size of image to be stored Same as Original Size Store an image the same size as the original Metric Select from A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 or Folio Inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio Il Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 or Youkei 2 Relationship between Original Size Storing Size and Zoom Original Size page 3 35 Storing Size and Zoom page 3 48 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you wish to the same different store as are Original Size Specify as necessary Specify as necessary Storing Size Select Same as Original Select the required size Zoom Select 100 or Auto Select Auto NOTE When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can store the image as the actual size No Zoom 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB on page 7 5 display the screen Ready to store in Box 10 10 Ready to store in Box 10 10 iT S C ry Orig
20. Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers Value PCL6 KPDL KPDL Auto KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode set whether or not the error report is output Value Off On Color Setting You can choose whether status reports are printed in color or black and white Value Color Black amp White EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem Value Off On Override A4 Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter which are similar in size as the same size when printing Value Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode Value 1 sided 2 sided Bind LongEdge 2 sided Bind ShortEdge Copies Set the default number of copies from 1 to 999 Value 1 to 999 copies Orientation Set the default orientation Portrait or Landscape Value Portrait Landscape Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page 78 characters at 10 pitch and Letter size page 80 characters at 10 pitch This setting is only effective in PCL 6 emulation Value Off On Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print
21. Zoom Select 100 or Auto Select Auto NOTE When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can send the image as the actual size No Zoom 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send _ 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 e i ee Dest om f Check y Sending Size Recall j check _ Gat Same as Original Size N amp File Separation n P gt a3 2 Off One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book gt a Scan Resolution a BI dpi i aN lt 300x300dpi T f Density E mail Folder FAX VW gt a Normal 0 _ Sj i y Favorites B Close Add Edi a S fi Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the sending size Same as Original Size 10 10 Metric gt Inch gt Others gt GB0071_00 a L S 6 37 sending gt Sending Functions Metric inch or Others 10 10 v a Select the desired size 6 38 GB0071_00 Ready to send 10 10 Cancel lt Back Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0072_00 sending gt Sending Functions File Separation Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page and send the files e NOTE Three digit serial number such as abc_001 pdf abc_002 pdf is attached to the end of the file name 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Bas
22. 1 Press the Send key Send NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the originals O For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 10 3 Selecting color mode al Auto Color Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a document is color or black amp white and then scans the 0 document Full Color Scans all documents in full color bd Full Color Black amp White Scans all documents in black amp white Q To make more detailed settings refer to Color Selection on page 3 51 Black amp White 4 Specifying destination Ready to send hy Select the destination to which to send an image Can Cs For details refer to Specifying Destination on page 6 15 One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book XY ai VY Folder a FAX s Functions w Favorites GB0055_00 Sending gt Basic Operation 5 Selecting the functions Ready to send 10 10 Datu Press Functions to display the sending functions to use Recall check _ For details refer to Sending Functions on page 6 36 X One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book m e o E mail _ Folder FAX Vv IL 6 Start sending Sta rt Press the Start key to start sending 0 6 4 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Check the information
23. 46 Paper Length Guide 47 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 48 Paper Size Dial 2 5 Preparation before Use gt Part Names Operation Panel System Menu Counter Displays the System Menu Counter Ends operation logs out on Q screen the Administration screen a a oe Copy Displays the Copy screen Puree machines Seco Mode Recovers from Sleep 5 if in Sleep Mode Favorites Displays the Favorites Send Displays the screen for Lit when the machine s main Application screen a sending power is on When using an application displays the application screen Document Displays the Document Displays the FAX screen Box screen l Select the color mode Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a document is color or black amp white and then scans the document Full Color Scans all documents in full color Black amp White Scans all documents in black amp white Sa S N lt System Menu Counter Status Job Cancel Copy i Favorites D p Application Send m s E Paper Zoom SM vensty 100 N 10 wee 4 orma are Ja Auto Color Black amp Combine Collate Document 4 White D De 8 2104 FAX 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off On G a G Quick No Clear Search Enter C A g Processing Memory Attention Pe Touch panel Displays buttons for Processing Blinks while printing or sending configuring machine settings Memory
24. From Operation Panel gt 1 1 GB0648_00 mmer 2 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images 6 44 sending gt Scanning using TWAIN Scanning using TWAIN This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example The WIA driver is used in the same way 4 Display the window 1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application 2 Select the machine using the application and display the TWAIN dialog box NOTE For selecting the machine see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software 2 Configure the function Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box that opens Original Configurations Original Size Image Quality Settings Color Settings a4 Black and White Original Orientation A f Send Configurations Duplex Setting Resolution 200d Image Quality l Text Image Adjustment Density off The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box are as follows Original Configurations Original Size Detail Select the scan size of the original Original Orientation Specify the type of binding Send Configurations Duplex Setting Specify whether the original is one sided or two sided Image Quality Settings Color Settings Select the color mode Resolution Select the res
25. Group Name When group authorization is enabled displays the name shown in the group list Group ID When group authorization is enabled displays the ID shown in the group list Cassette MP Tray Settings Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose tray Cassette Description Paper Size Set the paper size to load in Cassette 1 Value Metric Select fromA4 A5 A6 B5 or Folio Inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio II Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope C5 or Custom NOTE Paper Size is only displayed when the Cassette 1 size dial is set to Other For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size refer to Custom Paper Size on page 9 10 Media Type Set the media type to load in Cassette 1 Value Plain 105 g m or less Rough Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick 106 g m and more High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 9 10 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 for selecting Custom 1 8 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Cassette2 to 3 Paper Size Description Set the paper size to load in optional paper feeders Cassette 2 and 3 Value Metric Select from A4 A5 B5 or Folio Inch Sel
26. Off No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 pages Reject Usage Restriction is applied For details on the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction refer to Apply Limit on page 9 77 N 9 66 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 1 Select the item to limit Total selected for Copier Printer Count 10 10 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Scan Others Off FAX Transmission Off Account ID 00000001 Print Total Off Print Full Color Off Cancel GB0480_01 d GB0480_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Individual selected for Copier Printer Count System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Printer Total Account ID 00000001 Printer Full Color Copy Total off Copy Full Color off Cancel Scan Others FAX Transmission Cancel GB0480_02 GB0480_03 Use V or A to scroll up and down 2 Select a restriction method 10 10 Counter Limit gt Reject Usage l e If Counter Limit is selected press or numeric keys to select the number of pages and press OK GB0474_00 9 67 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printed Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounti
27. Permissions for james smith Allow Deny cat E Change 7 a Read W E Leam about access control and pemissions Select the entered user select the Change and Read permissions In Windows XP go to step 6 NOTE Everyone gives sharing permission to everyone on the network To strengthen security it is recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark 5 Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing screen to close the screen 6 gE scannerdata Properties General shea Securty A vus Versions Customize Object name C scannerdata Group or user names amp amp SYSTEM j 4 PC0391 PC00T james smith amp 2 Administrators PCOO1 Administrators 2 To change pemissions click Edit In Windows XP click the Security tab and then click the Add button 7 Proceed in the same way as in step 3 to add a user to Group or user names 8 Fare di Permissions for scannerdata Security Object name C scannerdata Group or user names Add Remove Permissions for james smith Allow Deny Caull annteal E A Modify E Read amp execute 2 Ao a E Read al A Leam about access control and pemissions 3 Cresi Select the added user select the Modify and Read amp execute permissions sending gt Preparation for Sending a Documen
28. Power Requirement 120V Specification Model 120V AC 60Hz more than 9 0A 230V Specification Model 220 240V AC 50 60Hz more than 4 8A Options Paper feeder up to 2 units Expansion memory Card Authentication Kit Gigabit Ethernet Board Printer Description Printing Speed Simplex A4 26 sheets min A5 B5 A6 until 15th image 28 sheets min 60 to 105 g m Letter 28 sheets min A5 B5 A6 from 16th image 14 sheets min Legal 23 sheets min Duplex A4 13 sheets min Letter 13 sheets min Legal 12 sheets min First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette Black amp White 9 0 seconds or less Color 10 5 seconds or less Resolution 600 dpi Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Apple Macintosh OS X Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T Page Description Language PRESCRIBE 11 19 Appendix gt Specifications Scanner Description System requirements CPU 1GHz RAM 256MB Resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200 x 400 dpi 200 x 100 dpi Resolution in FAX mode included File Format PDF PDF1 4 PDF A TIFF TIFF V6 TTN2 JPEG XPS Scanning Speed 1 sided B W 35 Images min Color 25 Images min 2 sided B W 18 Images min Color 13 Images min A4 landscape 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo original Int
29. Toner is running out C M Y K Error Message Unknown Toner Installed Checkpoints Is the installed toner container our own brand It is almost time to replace the toner container Obtain a new toner container Corrective Actions We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine Reference Page Unknown Toner Installed PC C IMI Y IK Does the installed toner container s regional specification match the machine s 10 18 Install the specified container Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages W Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Warning low memory F Job cannot be started Try again later Responding to Send Error Ooo Error Corrective Actions Reference Page 1101 Failed to send the e mail Check the host name of the SMTP server on the COMMAND CENTER 2 24 Failed to send via FTP Check the host name of FTP 6 20 Failed to send via SMB Check the host name of SMB 6 19 1102 Failed to send via SMB Check the SMB settings e Login user name and login password NOTE If the sender is a domain user specify the domain name e Host name e Path 6 20 Failed to send the e mail Check the followings on the COMMAND CENTER e SMTP login user name and login password e POP3 login user name and login password
30. the trash can icon 6 35 sending gt Sending Functions Sending Functions Send screen shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use V or A to select the function What do you want to do Select the file format for images being sent Reference Page File Format page 3 49 Specify the original size Original Size gt page 3 35 Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 36 Automatically scan 2 sided originals Duplex gt page 3 37 Change the size of the image being sent Sending Size gt page 6 37 Send each page in a separate file File Separation gt page 6 39 Set the resolution at which to scan originals Scan Resolution gt page 3 44 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 43 Change the color mode for images being sent Color Selection gt page 3 51 Select original image type for best results Original Image gt page 3 45 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness P page 3 46 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 47 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending size Zoom page 3 48 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Sca
31. 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 On gt J 1 1 GB0435_01 GB0691_00 a io Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Configure the function Server Name 10 10 Input 3 2 i Limit 64 389 1 i Name 1 displayName Up to 64 characters can be entered GB0692_00 GB0057_34 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 9 55 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Port System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 a iB a a a i i i ne es _ Server Name 1 65535 Port Name 1 displayName 3 Cancel OK d GB0692_02 GB0439_01 Name 1 and Name 2 System Menu Counter 10 10 Input 1 Limit 32 GB0692_02 GB0057_35 Up to 32 characters can be entered E mail Address 10 10 C i Input4 Limit 28 E mail Address mail AN T Search Timeout pasar GB0692_01 GB0057_36 Up to 128 characters can be entered Search Timeout 10 10 10 10 E mail Address mail Search Timeout 60sec 2 2 gt 5 255 GB0692_01 GB0693_00 ya T 3 Press OK 9 56 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations e Manageability
32. 105 x 235 mm Executive 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm Oficio Il 16K 273 x 197 mm ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm Size Entry 70 x 148 to 216 x 352 mm These paper sizes can be loaded into the optional paper feeder Except for the optional paper feeder Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth but it must be uncoated With paper that is too smooth and slippery several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once causing jams Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area In the United States basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream 500 sheets of paper cut to the standard size or trade size for a specific grade of paper Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams which may cause excessive wear of the machine Mixed paper weight i e thickness may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick The proper thickness is between 0 086 and 0 110 mm Moisture Content Paper moisture
33. 2 4 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 1 GB0052_01 gt EE Ww A Toner Status 2 OK rene Status No Paper Pause All Print Jobs K GB0052_02 Status Job Cancel 10 10 Removable Memory Attached Pas USB Keyboard 2 Invalid 4 4 EEE Pause All Print Jobs Select the device you wish to check GB0052_03 2 Check the status Scanner 10 10 GB0189_00 The status of an original scanning in the document processor or the error information paper jam opened cover etc is displayed 8 12 Status Job Cancel gt Check of Device Status Printer Status Job Cancel GB0190_00 Error information such as paper jam out of toner or out of paper and status such as waiting or printing are displayed FAX 1 1 10 10 Vv el e The information such as sending receiving and dialing is displayed GB0191_00 e Press Line Off to cancel a fax in sending receiving For details refer to the FAX Operation Guide NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Removable Memory 10 10 Status Loaded Capacity 1 9GB 1 1 Used Area 684 1MB Free Space 1 2GB Menu Remove End Memory l e The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed GB0194_00 e Press Menu and then Format to format external media e Press
34. 2 Configure the function Enter the correct settings in each field Description SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol To use E mail this protocol must be enabled SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25 SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters If entering the name a DNS server address must also be configured The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP IP General tab SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds Authentication Protocol Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP as the protocol The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000 Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the login user name is 64 characters 2 24 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail Login Password Description When Other is selected for Authenticate the password set here will be used for authentication The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters POP before SMTP Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds when you have
35. Copy Inch Models 400 Max 200 129 STMT gt gt Letter 100 78 Legal gt gt Letter 64 Letter gt gt STMT 50 25 Min Standard Zoom Other Inch Models Zoom Entry Zoom Level Original Copy 141 A5 gt gt A4 115 B5 gt gt A4 90 Folio gt gt A4 86 A4 gt gt B5 70 A4 gt gt A5 Metric Models WV Kexef 1 Metric Models 400 Max 200 141 A5 gt gt A4 100 90 Folio gt gt A4 70 A4 gt gt A5 50 25 Min Zoom Level Original Copy 129 STMT gt gt Letter 115 B5 gt gt A4 86 A4 gt gt B5 78 Legal gt gt Letter 64 Letter gt gt STMT Specify the image size in 1 increment between 25 400 of the original 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen 4 5 Copying gt Copying Functions 2 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies 1 Paper BE Density Selection A4 If Normal 0 mre ee fr Duplex Combine gyp Collate Y a 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off On xv Favorites Select the function Auto Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Standard Zoom gt Others gt Zoom Entry gt L J Standard Zoom Other 10 10 Auto Standard Zoom 1 Zoom Entry gt L 5 gt Select the zoom level Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 N O O
36. G 6 15 Sending gt Specifying Destination Destination Search 10 10 Address Book All Y Q _ Searches by destination name NAT 123456 123456 c Advanced search by type of registered destination E abo YS 125456 12304567890 E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group oos 123456 12345 com a J004 i 123456 11111 com a GB0426_00 Enk el Displays details for individual destinations You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search EEN 10 10 Eee 10 10 Address Book All IYiTQ v 001 i 123456 123456 S Narrow Down jo02 123456 123 456789 co ad Search Name 1 1 _ 003 123456 12345 com aw Search No L fo04 123456 11111 com um Sort Name GB0426_00 GB0396_00 e Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group Use V or AN to scroll up and down Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number NOTE You may choose multiple destinations To cancel a selection press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark 3 Accept the destinations Ready to send 10 10 Address Book All IYr Vi o01 123456 123456 c _ o02 123456 123 456789 co Gaul 1 1 L
37. G70 e ue EDE pE E A E E A NE N E T eee E N A E E ee 3 51 JOD Finish INO UCC sisser anaE E EE EEA EA EDESA 3 52 File Name ENUY occas dices aeccies ensani EE ES 3 54 PROV OV COS aoran E E a A EEEE 3 55 MOVES resco ease stecree stews EEA E 4 1 BoE OOS ANON sarr cutee set peed since ncn E O A 4 2 OS FUNCIONS rcpt esas ceicae se see pec E EENE EEE E 4 4 LOON aar ee EE EEEE EE OEE EEEE E uae EE E 4 5 DUDI reer a A E E A 4 7 OM aE aagaanseutssicw ica EE 4 10 OO FIN gece recep e eres steep E EO nosey ean EE 4 13 Hue A CIUSUMOMG cde oiscedcccedceensssatcent aaen EE EE A e aE 4 14 color BuO enc A E E EE A E 4 15 SAO oae E E A he reece E A EE A EE 4 16 PAO aroan a EEEE 5 1 Printing rom AppcCatiOnS sie dct octSetocdeeteesadscsactoecscetesusensbdtesunweseteremerasdeusUeetasdluetosacatheetadsececuies 5 2 Printing Data Saved on the Printer naanannnnnnnnnannennennornnnrnnrnnrnnrrorrnnrrnrrnrrsrrnrrnnernernrenrrnnen 5 6 PAVO E EEE EE EEE E E EEEE 5 6 POOF NETO a E E E seen es oe eicoseecoue 5 8 Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents nnonnonnennnennnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnne 5 11 SENAO osaa E E E EN 6 1 B COP AO ar E E E E terns pbeeet soscees 6 2 Preparation for Sending a Document tO a PC a saansanssnnnnnsnnnnnnsinrrnsrrsrrrnrrrnrsrrsnrnnrnnrnnrrnrrsnrnnnn 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Host Name c cccceccccececeeeseeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeees 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Login User Name
38. IPv6 to connect to the network The IPv6 setting is available when selecting On for TCP IP IPv6 Sets whether to use IPv6 Value Off On Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address prefix length and gateway address of TCP IP IPv6 The Manual Setting is available when selecting On for IPv 6 Value IP Address Manual numbers 128 bit in total separated by colons Prefix Length 0 to 128 Default Gateway HH HH FHT HHH NOTE Default Gateway is displayed when selecting Off for RA Stateless RA Stateless Select whether or not to use RA Stateless The RA Stateless setting is available when selecting On for IPv 6 When selecting On IP Address 1 to 5 appears under IP Address Stateless Prefix Length Value Off On Select whether or not to use the DHCP IPv6 server The DHCP IPv6 setting is available when selecting On for IPv6 Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Item Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Description Protocol Detail The table below lists the network related function settings The network related functions are available when TCP IP is On NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI Value Off On LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol Value Off On
39. Job Accounting Default Setting 2 0 0 0 cccccceccseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeeaeeeseeeaees 9 71 Unknown Login User Name JOD ccc ccccceccceecceececeeeee cece eeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeesaeess 9 72 10 MOUS SIO OUHNG recreates screenees EA A 10 1 Toner Container Replacement cccsscccsccceecceucceececeeecueeceaeecaeesaeecsueeseeecueeseeessueseaeeeas 10 2 Waste Toner Box Replacement cccccccscccsecceeeceeecceeeceeeceueecaeecacecsueceueceueesseesaeeseeesaaes 10 4 CNS AN cerne tee ees tebe ceases E E EEEE E EE 10 6 Glass IPN sprengir eee EEE AEE E AE EATE EENE 10 6 Do c ument Processor seisanud ianiai inina aa E E a aai 10 6 Paper Transiter UNIT seasainn iaee adinean 10 7 SONING VIGIFUNIGUOINS seruran onsen iE SE EET EEEE EE AE 10 8 Responding to Error Messages cccceecceeece eee eeeeeeecaeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeereees 10 13 Clearing Paper Jams ccspecce casei ccd Sagate tren wosdenicanedet dacure acceesunnndiobetetbauecosentosesoeceenedate iiai 10 22 Paper Jam OGAUOM assistiren E EE DEEA 10 22 IGE P rpose Tray ssc sist erate cancneetuiebaes r ae iE at 10 23 e eee i EE E EE AEEA E E E AE AEE 10 23 PSCC OSE readers d pe tees eecee tecpoces pna iaaa a Ee iEn 10 24 inside THE WIACIING wiccuosaicaccunscdcadeniewandonstudanstuectiveceddectiowweaaseuaetad dassallesacieateencdaddaeesedas 10 24 DIO CUIMGNE PIOCCSS OM ic isciece ccs see esaeetevinen eden cennesieicawskesceeaceatn
40. Kyocera TWAIN Driver S Scanner List About Help NOTE Click Delete to delete the added machine Click Edit to change names Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Setting WIA Driver Register this machine to the WIA Driver Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7 NOTE The following is not necessary to register when using the machine possesses an IP address or host name that you have specified during installation of WIA Driver 1 Display the screen 1 Click the Windows Start button and enter Scanner in Program and File Search Click View scanners and cameras in the search list 2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers and press the Properties If you do not see your device in the list make sure it is connected to the computer and turned on then choose Refresh Refresh Add Device Scan Profiles 4 Proper ies Do I need to use this to install my scanner or camera 2 Configure WIA Driver Scanner Authentication Enter the machine name OTe et When using SSL select the aa 3 4 checkbox beside SSL When user login administration is enabled select the checkbox beside Authentication and enter Login User Name up to 64 characters and Password up to 64 characters When job accounting is enabled select the checkbox beside Account ID and enter the account ID as many as eight digits NOTE Ent
41. Remove Memory to safely remove the external media This operation is the same as that for Removing USB Memory on page 7 7 8 13 Status Job Cancel gt Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper Check the remaining amount of toner and paper on the touch panel 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status status eT 7 Job Cancel fere mins A Drax 2 Waiting S Toner Status OK 1 Proe Status No Paper Pause All Print Jobs Select the consumable you wish to check 3 4 Use V or AN to scroll up and down lt GB0052_02 2 Check the status Toner Status Black EC 100 Cyan 100 1 2 Magenta p 100 10 10 Yellow a 100 VY End GB0192_00 GB0192_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down You can check the remaining amount of each color toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0 and check the status of waste toner box Paper Status Status Job Cancel 10 10 4 P Piain B 21 AGED B E a4 AGED B 1 1 MIGS P Piain B End el GB0193_00 You can check the size orientation type and remaining amount of paper in each paper source The remaining amount of paper is shown by four levels as Z Z 1 and _I _ none If there is no paper in either cassette the paper status will be shown as No Paper and _ are displayed only on optional paper feeders Cassette 2
42. SMTP E mail TX Select whether or not to send e mail using SMTP Value Off On POP3 E mail RX Select whether or not to receive e mail using POPS Value Off On FTP Client Transmission Select whether or not to send documents using FTP When selecting On set the FTP Port Number Use the FTP default port 21 Value Off On Port 1 65535 FTP Server Reception Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP Value Off On SMB Client Transmission Select whether or not to send documents using SMB When selecting On set the SMB default Port Number Use the SMB default port 139 For Windows Vista use 445 Value Off On Port 1 65535 LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP Value Off On SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP Value Off On SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3 Value Off On HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP Value Off On HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 22 Value Off On IPP Select whether or not to communicate using IPP When selecting On set the IPP default Port Number Use the IPP default port 631 Value Off On Port 1 65535 IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL When selecting On set the IPP over SSL default Port Number Use the IPP over SSL default port 4
43. Units mm Zoom 96 Print to file 1 1 A aD Gees 1 Select the printer 2 Click Properties button 5 2 Printing gt Printing from Applications Properties Unspecified Destination Printer default Duplex Portrait Landscape E Print on both sides Flip on long edge il Flip on short edge Full color Collate Black amp White E EcoPrint E Print preview 6 CP KYOCERA Profiles J Cancel 3 Select the Basic tab 4 Click the Page Sizes button to select the paper size for the document data 5 Click Print size and select the paper size to use for printing 6 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box 3 Start printing r Print Printer Nme Gi Status Error 1 documents waiting Comments and Forms Type Document and Markups Print Range Preview Composite OA e eee Current view Current page Pages 1 Subset All pages in range Reverse pages Page Handling Copies 1 Collate 297 01 Page Scaling Shrink to Printable Area M V Auto Rotate and Center Choose paper source by PDF page size Use custom paper size when needed Print to file 1 1 Click OK button NOTE Click the tabs on the print settings screen and configure the print settings as necessary For more information refer to the Printer Driver Operation Guide Printing gt Printing from Applications
44. and User Management gt User Login Administration Icon 10 10 User System Menu Counter 10 10 r ia il Male 2 2 r Jiii 1 User A are 2 5 i ge Password Login Off 1 lag Mmm P eno ga Icon Male 1 o lt a ao Cancel Cancel 1 2 lt J GB0739_00 GB0828_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 3 Register the user 10 10 2 4 Password Login off GB0739_00 Cancel Save d To delete A gjo l jo af O 03 User D 04User E 05 None oN 1 1 J E 06 None 07 None 08 None T GB0712_01 Select the user you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon NOTE You can also delete a user by selecting the name pressing Menu and then pressing Delete 9 50 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Group Authorization Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server NOTE To use the group authorization settings Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method and NTLM or Kerberos must be selected as the server type in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 9 34 Select On for LDAP in Protocol Detail on page 9 20 Group Authorization Settings Use the group authorization 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 33 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Sy
45. in Optional Memory Removable memory error Is writing to a removable An error occurred in the removable 7 2 memory prohibited memory The job stopped Press End Possible error codes are as follows 01 Connect a removable memory that can be written to An error occurred in the removable 7 2 memory The job stopped Press End Possible error codes are as follows 01 The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded Restart the system or turn the power OFF ON If the error still occurs the removable memory is not compatible with the machine Use the removable memory formatted by this machine If the removable memory cannot be formatted it is damaged Connect a compatible removable memory Removable Memory is full Job is canceled Press End Insufficient free space in the removable memory Delete unneeded files Remove originals in the Are there any originals left in the Remove originals from the document document processor document processor processor Replace all originals and press Remove originals from the document Continue processor put them back in their original order and place them again Press Continue to resume printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Replace MK Replacement of the parts in the maintenance kit is necessary at every 200 000 pages of printing and requires professional servicing Contact your Service R
46. 0 wy Favorites GBO0001_01 Send 10 10 Dest 0 Recall check One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book E mail Folder FAX V vv Favorites GB0055_00 2 Adjust density Ready to copy Full Color GB0008_00 E l o Press 3 to 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density 3 43 Scan to USB 10 10 Te File Duplex Scan TL Format B Resolution PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi OO l il Density L File Name ze a Entry Normal 0 Functions GB0096_00 Cancel Ready to send 10 10 sy Sending Size ee Same as Original Size N File Separation aa pf Fl Scan Resolution dpi 300x300dpi Density i Normal 0 Vv Close Ad fed Shortcut J GB0081_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution The selectable resolution is 200 x 100dpi 200 x 200dpi Fine 200 x 400dpi Super 300 x 300dpi 400 x 400dpi Ultra or 600 x 600dpi NOTE The larger the number the better the image resolution However better resolution also means larger file sizes and longer send times 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen Send 10 10 10 10 Dest 0 Check Ey Sending Size Kio Bolly ee Same as Original Size ee File Separation
47. 11 7 for details on entering characters N Register the destination System Menu Counter 10 10 Name Sales department 1 FAX Number 0123456 Sub Address TX Start Speed 33600bps l e GB0754_00 Sending gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Editing and Deleting One Touch Key Edit and delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down System Menu Counter ii E Internet 2 AN lt gt System Menu Counter E o s 4 5 E z User Login Job Accounting Ee Printer VY System Menu Counter Address Book gt One Touch Key Address Book Defaults gt Print List gt 1 GB0054_03 10 10 GB0411_00 2 Edit or delete the destination To edit the destination 10 10 Tat 3 003 None 001 Sales 002 None iB department 1 1 004 None 005 None 006 None 1 9 Delete 008 None 009 None 007 None 012 None 011 None 010 None a Select the One Touch Key you wish to edit and press Menu followed by Edit I lt GB0430_00 m et GB0422_01 To delete System Menu Counter 5 00 ales uuz None uus None 7 fi department 1 department 1 1 004 None 005 None 006 None 1 9 007 None 008 None 009 None 011 None 012 None 010 None S lt GB0422_01 Select the One Touch Key you wish to delete and press Delete
48. 2 Server Type Kerberos Host Name abc 1 Domain Name Input 3 Limit 256 d GB0437_02 GB0057_25 When selecting NTLM or Kerberos as the server type enter a domain name of 256 characters or less Enter the port number 10 10 10 10 Server Type 1 65535 Host Name 2 When selecting Ext as the server type enter the port number Port oN GB0437_01 GB0439_00 a t Press Save 10 10 Server Type Ext Host Name abc Port 9093 GB0437_01 Cancel NOTE If the login user name and password are rejected check the following settings e Network Authentication setting of the machine e User property of the Authentication Server e Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings If the server type is Kerberos only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized 9 35 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Adding a User This adds a new user You can add Up to 100 users including the default login user name The table below explains the user information to be registered User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list up to 32 characters Login User Name Enter the login user name to login up to 64 characters The same login user
49. 2600 amp Admin Admin S w GB0440_00 l d 3 Log out Logout The registered user logs in for operations Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password a Keyboard GB0723_00 t 9 32 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration User Login Settings 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down a lt gt System Menu Counter Bomen AW E Address Book One Touch 2 h 4 5 f z User Login Job Accounting E Printer System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Settings gt Job Accounting Settings 3 Unknown ID Job Reject GB0054_03 GB0434_00 NOTE You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 36 for the default login user name and password Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard Q oO oO N N QO a Oo el 2 Configure the function System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings gt 1 1 Local User Authorization Off Enabling Disabling User Login Administration gt page 9 34 X Adding a User gt page 9 36 Local User Authorization page 9 40 Editing and Deleting Users page 9 42 Simple Login gt page 9 45 Group Authorization gt page 9 51 Obtain Network User Property gt page 9 55 GB0435_00 9 33
50. 3 3 Paper Size and Media Type 3 29 9 7 Cassette 1 2 2 Character Entry Method 11 7 Checking the Counter 3 14 Cleaning Document Processor 10 6 Glass Platen 10 6 Paper Transfer Unit 10 7 Coated Paper 11 17 Collate 3 42 Color Balance 4 15 Colored Paper 11 16 Color Registration 9 25 Color Selection 3 51 Combine 4 10 2in1 4 10 4in1 4 10 Border Line 4 10 COMMAND CENTER 2 23 Connecting LAN Cable 2 10 Power Cable 2 11 USB Cable 2 11 Connection Method 2 8 Continuous Scan 3 39 Conventions in This Guide 1 13 Copying 4 1 Copying Settings Auto Priority 9 14 Auto Paper Selection 9 14 DP Read Action 9 14 D Date Timer 2 22 9 23 Auto Error Clear 9 23 Auto Panel Reset 9 23 Date Time 9 23 Date Format 9 23 Error Clear Timer 9 24 Panel Reset Timer 9 23 Sleep Timer 9 24 Time Zone 9 23 Default Background Density Adj 9 12 Collate 9 11 Color Selection Copy 9 11 Color Selection Send Store 9 12 Continuous Scan 9 12 EcoPrint 9 12 E mail Subject Body 9 12 File Format 9 11 File Name Entry 9 12 File Separation 9 11 FTP Encrypted TX 9 12 Image Quality 9 12 JPEG TIFF Print 9 12 Original Image 9 12 Original Orientation 9 11 PDF A Setting 9 12 Scan Resolution 9 11 XPS Fit to Page 9 12 Zoom 9 12 Default Gateway 11 22 Setup 9 18 Default Screen 9 9 Density 3 43 Destination 6 15 Checking and Editing 6 22 Choosing by One Touch Key 6 17 Choosing from the Address Book 6 15 Dest Check before Send 9 14 Entering a New E mail Addre
51. 6 35 Open SSL License 1 9 Operation Panel 2 2 2 6 Option Card Authentication Kit 11 4 Expansion Memory 11 3 Gigabit Ethernet Board 11 4 Overview 11 2 Paper Feeder 11 2 Optional Function 11 5 Optional Memory 9 23 Option Interface Slot 1 2 4 Option Interface Slot 2 2 4 Original Eject Table 2 5 Original Image 3 45 Original Orientation 3 36 Originals Custom Original Size 9 9 Default Original Size 9 9 Loading Originals 3 10 Original Size 3 35 Original Size 3 35 Original SSLeay License 1 10 Original Stopper 2 5 Original Table 2 5 Original Width Guides 2 5 P Paper 11 10 Appropriate Paper 11 11 Before Loading 3 2 Cassette 9 7 Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 8 14 Custom Paper Size 9 10 Default Paper Source 9 10 Loading Envelopes 3 8 Loading in the Cassettes 3 3 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 3 6 Media for Auto 9 10 Media Type Setting 9 10 Multi Purpose Tray 9 8 Setup 9 10 Size and Media 3 29 9 7 Special Paper 11 14 Special Paper Action 9 10 Specifications 11 11 Paper Feeder 11 2 Paper Feed Mode 9 17 Paper Gauge 2 2 3 5 Paper Jam 10 22 Cassette 10 23 Document Processor 10 26 Inside the Machine 10 24 Multi Purpose Tray 10 23 Paper Feeder 10 24 Paper Jam Location 10 22 Paper Length Guide 2 5 Paper Ramp 2 3 Paper Selection 3 41 Paper Size Dial 2 5 3 4 Paper Stopper 2 2 3 5 Paper Transfer Unit 2 3 Paper Type Indicators 11 17 Paper Width Guides 2 5 Part Names 2 2 PDF A 11 24 Platen 2
52. 9 17 Color Selection Copy page 9 17 Color Select Send Store page 9 72 Original Image page 9 72 Background Density Adj page 9 72 EcoPrint page 9 72 FAX TX Resolution refer to Fax Operation Guide Zoom page 9 72 Continuous Scan page 9 72 File Name Entry page 9 72 E mail Subject Body page 9 72 FTP Encrypted TX page 9 72 JPEG TIFF Print page 9 72 XPS Fit to Page page 9 72 Detail Settings page 9 Image Quality page 9 12 12 PDF A page 9 12 Preset Limit page 9 72 Error Handling page 9 Duplexing Error page 9 73 13 Paper Mismatch Error page 9 13 Measurement page 9 73 Keyboard Layout page 9 73 USB Keyboard Type page 9 73 Copy page 9 74 Auto Paper Selection page 9 74 Auto Priority page 9 74 DP Read Action page 9 74 Send page 9 74 Dest Check before Send page 9 74 Entry Check for New Dest page 9 74 Send and Forward Forward page 9 74 page 9 74 Destination page 9 74 Color TIFF Compression page 9 74 Default Screen page 9 74 XVI Document Box Sub Address Box refer to Fax Operation Guide Job Box page 5 6 Quick Copy Job Retention page 5 8 Deletion of Job Retention page 5 11 Polling Box refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX refer to Fax Operation Guide Favorites
53. A edogtos ste drededsuershadensuateetones 9 5 SEI FOE aE SE E EE A 9 7 Cassette MP Tray Settings c cccccccccccssceceeeeeeeeeseceese cess ceseeesseeessaeesseeeseeesseeeees 9 7 COMMONS SWINGS erisia a AEE e E T 9 9 COD eae E E E E E EEE A sedan steeecene tee eeteu 9 14 S 66 E E T E E A E E EET ee A A EET ee 9 14 Favortes APpiCatON sesinccscccesdatezecyeeassen ninn a EEE EEA N aR aaa 9 15 EOE oa ee ccectentocaesnectecsanereucessdaceuatlecdamsed E E ET Ei 9 15 PGT saaren eE RA E E 9 16 Y ea E E E E E E TE E E E E A 9 18 Date TIMO porren edocs son n EAEE EEE E EEE E T E TE 9 23 Adjustment Maintenance ccccscccscccsceceeeceueceueceeeceeseeceeesueesaeesaeesseeeseeenaeesanees 9 24 Color Registration Procedure cccccccccscceeccceeeceeeceueccueecueecueeceeeceeesaeesaeesueeneeeaas 9 26 User Login Administration sscxcsSaicsenwaccsanececteseninsewiecuiswnsecdsseaweids ieeeeesansseuberekuosmennseeseiessdenees 9 32 First User Login Administration cece cc cccceccseeeceeeeeeceseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseueeseeeseeeseeees 9 32 User Login SENGS eas cars scceetacsictccressepectacusenssavacsee cancer nena a aai 9 33 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration cccccceecceecceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeas 9 34 AONO T aa aeenena ne erie eee een mee nee ett eet eae ree ae eer ae enn eee ee 9 36 Local User Authorization ccccccceccceeccececeeeeeueceueeceeeceueceueceeesseesaeesseeseaessaeesage
54. A r L Duplex Combine gp Collate I i a 1 awl J 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off On GB0001_01 2 Select the paper source Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 2 A4 Plain GB0004_00 QO ia If Auto is selected the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically 2 Cassette 2 and 3 Cassette 3 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed M indicates the MP tray 3 41 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Collate USB Collate the output by page Collate Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen 2 Press Collate Ready to copy Full Color s 10 10 opy m l i Copies Paper A Zoom al Density Selection L paca A40 100 Normal 0 m M Duplex so SY 2 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off GB0001_01 2 Select the function Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 co A e a 0 a e 3 42 Density Adjust density using 7 levels Common Operations gt Using Various Functions ix lt Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen Copy 10 10 Conies 1 Paper R Zoom Density Selection ot Normal
55. Adds a new destination 10 10 Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0396_01 3 Select the registration method 10 10 1 1 el GB0419_01 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 4 Enter the group name Support department Input18 1 Limit 32 GB0057_16 Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 5 Enter the address number Ready to send 10 10 10 10 Name Support department 1 Address Number Auto Member Member 0 000 250 1 1 GB0217_01 Cancel d GB0420_02 d Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 250 Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups If you set 000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number 6 Select the members destinations 1 Display the screen 10 10 Ready to send Name Support department Address Number Auto 1 a i 1 1 Member Member 0 2 Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box Ready to send 10 10 Address Book Contact IXE 001 p Sales departrient 1 0123456 S N m e Qa e t GB0114_03 GB0420_02 Searches by des
56. Blinks while the machine is accessing the fax memory or USB memory generalpurpose item Attention Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped A Numeric keys Clears entered numbers and Reset Returns settings to their mo Enter numbers and characters default states PQRS TUV WXYZ sym bo S 7 0900 Specifies registered Stop Cancels or pauses the information such as address printing job in progress numbers and user IDs by number Finalizes numeric key entry Start Starts copying and and finalizes screen during scanning operations and setting of functions Operates processing for setting linked with the on screen OK operations Preparation before Use gt Part Names Touch Panel Displays the status of the Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Displays the time and number of equipment as well as necessary A r Men copies operation Messages Paper Zoom il Density Selection EA i i i A4 100 N 10 Displays available functions en a ee Mre GS Duplex Combine 3 bi ee S fe sided gt gt 1 sided Off On fo Configures more advanced function Displays Favorites settings N 1 a 2 li Favorites Displays shortcuts Displays the status of the Ready to copy Eulleor 10 10 equipment as well as necessary operation messages m Original Size A4 T Original Orientation Top Edge on Left Scrolls up and dow
57. Block the connection Leam more about actions 2 New Inbound Rule Wizard Profile Specify the profiles for which this rule applies Steps Rule Type When does this rule apply Protocol and Ports Action V Domain Profile Applies when a computer is connected to its corporate domain Name V Private Applies when a computer is connected to a private network location V Public Applies when a computer is connected to a public network location Leam more about profiles 2 Make sure all checkboxes are selected 6 13 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC New Inbound Rule Wizard Name Specify the name and description of this rule Steps Enter Scan to SMB in Name and click Finish In Windows XP or Windows Vista 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security or Security Center and then Check Firewall Status or Windows Firewall If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button 2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port button 3 Specify Add a Port settings Enter any name in Name example Scan to SMB This will be the name of the new port Enter 139 in Port Number Select TCP for Protocol 4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box 6 14 sending gt Specifying Destination Specifying Destination Select the
58. Custom NOTE For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size refer to Custom Paper m Size on page 9 10 Media Type Set the media type for multi purpose tray Value Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more Coated High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 9 10 Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 for selecting Custom 1 8 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Common Settings Configures overall machine operation Default Screen Item Description Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen Value Copy Send FAX Document Box Favorites Application Status Default Screen Sound Description Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations Volume Set the buzzer volume level Value O Mute 1 Minimum to 5 Maximum Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are pressed Value Off On Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed Value Off On FAX Reception Only NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Ready Emit a sound when the warm up is completed Value Of
59. Description Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time Value 1 to 999 copies Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Error Handling Description Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type Value 1 sided Printed in 1 sided Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Paper Mismatch Error Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi purpose tray Value Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Measurement Item Description Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions Value mm Inch Keyboard Layout Item Description Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters Value QWERTY QWERTZ AZERTY USB Keyboard Type Item Description USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use Value US English US English with Euro Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Copy Configures settings for copying functions Auto Paper Selection Description If Auto is selected for Paper Selection set the paper size selection method whe
60. Description Reference Location Page 1 Clear the paper jammed in the multi purpose 10 23 tray AA 2 Clear the paper jammed in cassette 10 23 J a T 3 Clear the paper jammed in paper feeder 10 24 P AONT 4 Clear the paper jammed inside the machine 10 24 SR OJ rs ene por AA ie a a A 5 Clear the paper jammed in the document 10 26 Ke Be as Se g f ce Ber 4 Ye processor y Eis i o NE D EA O a Precautions with Paper Jams e Do not reuse jammed papers e Ifthe paper tears during removal be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine e Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming A CAUTION The fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned 10 22 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Multi Purpose Tray Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray pr ET Sees i Qe R NS a a Soe aA ar SP Cassette Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette NOTE If the paper cannot be removed do not try to forcefully remove it Go to paper jam nside the Machine on page 10 24 10 23 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Paper Feeder Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional paper feeder NOTE If
61. GB0055_00 10 10 Address Book All IXY B 001 123456 123456 001 E 123456 123 456789 co G 1 1 001 g 123456 12345 com am 001 pe 123456 11111 com GB0426_01 am d a 2 Adds a new destination E e ee 10 10 Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0396_01 3 Select the registration method Select the address type 10 10 Group gt 1 1 GB0419_01 e 6 24 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book 4 Enter the destination name Sales department 1 Input 18 opoe 1 Limit 32 GBO0057_ 11 Cancel Up to 32 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 5 Enter the address number Select the item that you want to change 10 10 10 10 Name Sales department 1 1 Address Number Auto 1 2 E mail Address el Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 250 000 250 GB0078_02 GB0217_01 Address Number is an ID for a destination You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups If you set 000 as the address number the address is registered under the lowest available number 6 Enter the destination 10 10 10 10 E mail Address GB0078_03 e GB0078_02 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the type of destination to register For de
62. Is FIPS available e Is the encryption available 2101 Failed to send via SMB Check the network and SMB settings 2 24 Failed to send via FTP Check the network and FTP settings e The network cable is connected e The hub is not operating properly e The server is not operating properly e Host name and IP address e Port number Failed to send the e mail Check the network and COMMAND CENTER e The network cable is connected e The hub is not operating properly e POP3 server name of the POP3 user e SMTP server name 2102 Failed to send via FTP Check the followings of the FTP server 2103 e Is FTP available e The server is not operating properly Failed to send the e mail Check the network e The network cable is connected e The hub is not operating properly e The server is not operating properly 2201 Failed to send the e mail Check the network Failed to send via FTP e The network cable is connected Failed to send via SMB e The hub is not operating properly 2202 Failed io send ional e The server is not operating properly Failed to send via FTP 2203 Failed to send via FTP Failed to send via SMB 2204 Failed to send the e mail Check the e mail size limit of the SMTP settings on the 2 24 COMMAND CENTER 2231 Failed to send via FTP Check the network e The network cable is connected e The hub is not operating properly e The server is not operating properly 3101 Failed to send the e mail Check the authentication m
63. Location Kind Po sai a Status Idle _ Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences Default printer Last Printer Used IZ Default paper size A4 Z M Click the lock to prevent further changes k the lock furth 2 18 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Setting TWAIN Driver Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver 1 Display the screen 1 Select Start button of the Windows display All Programs Kyocera and then TWAIN Driver Setting 2 Click Add amp Kyocera TWAIN Driver na lt Scanner List Toe ee Sat da Add About Help 2 Configure TWAIN Driver Kyocera TWAIN Driver ea x Name 1 Enter the machine name Model Select this machine from the list Scanner Address 1521684821 3 Enter the machine s IP address or host name When using SSL select the checkbox beside SSL User Authentication Setting When user login administration is enabled select P Aata the checkbox beside Authentication and enter ee Login User Name up to 64 characters and administrator Password up to 64 characters Password i When job accounting is enabled select the M ssi 3 b z checkbox beside Account ID and enter the 4 account ID as many as eight digits Help 7 ae anne NOTE When the machine s IP address is unknown contact Administrator 3 Finish registering amp
64. Memory Use V or AN to scroll up and down 10 10 ABC Gp DEF gt 1 25 lt gt B GHI gt Sort Name Cel a SIV Sort Date and Time GB0107_01 Close a 3 Remove the USB memory After Removable Memory can be safely removed is displayed press OK and remove the USB memory NOTE USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device For details refer to Check of Device Status on page 8 12 N 1 1 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Functions for Document Box Print or Store file screen in Document Box shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use V or A to select the function When printing from USB memory What do you want to do Reference Page Specify the paper size and type Paper Selection page 3 41 Collate the output documents in page order Collate gt page 3 42 Print on both sides of the paper Duplex gt page 7 9 Change the color mode Color Selection page 3 51 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice page 3 52 Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority Priority Override page 3 55 Password protect a PDF file Encrypted PDF Password gt page 7 10 Set the image size resolution when printing a JPEG or TIFF file JPEG TIFF Print gt page 7 11 Print an XPS file so that it fits
65. One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book i j a Scan Resolution cE a r Doo 300x300dpi E mail Folder 2 6 N g FAX lt Densi E Normal 0 Shortcu Use V or AN to scroll up and down xv Favorites Wh GB0081_01 Scan to USB 10 10 A g oe o qT File Duplex a Format e Resolution PDF 1 sided 1300x300dpi all Density File Name e fab abf Entry Normal 0 doc GB0096_00 Cancel 2 Select the resolution Ready to send 600x600dpi 400x400dpi Ultra 300x300dpi Fie ial 200x400dpi Super 200x200dpi Fine 200x100dpi Normal QO i GB0085_00 3 44 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Image copy sena ea USB Select original image type for best results Text Photo Best for originals which contain a mixture of text and photos Best for photographs Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines Graphic Map Best for graphics and maps Printer Output Best for documents printed on this machine originally Text for OCR For documents to be read by OCR This function is displayed while copying This function is displayed when the color mode is Auto Color B amp W or Black amp White when sending or storing 1 2 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Ima
66. Print Job Log page 8 7 Send Job Log page 8 7 Store Job Log page 8 7 Scanner page 8 72 Printer page 8 73 FAX page 8 73 Toner Status page 8 14 Paper Status page 8 74 Removable Memory page 8 73 xiii lt gt System Menu Counter v Quick Setup Wizard page 3 29 FAX Setup page 3 29 Paper Setup page 3 29 Energy Saver Setup page 3 29 Language page 9 5 Report page 9 5 Report Print page 9 5 Status Page page 9 5 Font List page 9 5 Network Status page 9 5 Service Status page 9 6 Accounting Report page 9 6 Sub Address Box List refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX List Index refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX List No refer to Fax Operation Guide Outgoing FAX Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Incoming FAX Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Admin Report Settings refer to Fax Operation Guide Result Report Setting Send Result Report page 9 6 page 9 6 RX Result Report refer to Fax Operation Guide Job Finish Notice Setting page 9 6 Sending Log History Send Log History page 8 10 page 8 8 pag Auto Sending page 8 10 Destination page 8 9 Job Log Subject page 8 11 Counter Printed Pages page 3 14 Scanned Pages page 3 14 User Property page 9 7 User Name page 9 7 Login User
67. Service Altitude Adjustment This sets the altitude adjustment mode If you are using the machine at an altitude of 1500 m or higher and print quality has deteriorated the Altitude Adjustment mode setting can be used to restore print quality Value Normal High 1 High 2 This sets the output of the main charger When print quality has deteriorated the output of the main charger can be changed to restore print quality Value 1 5 NOTE This menu only appears when Altitude Adjustment is set to Normal If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key 9 25 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Color Registration Procedure Normal registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration Color drift can be largely corrected through normal registration However if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings use the detailed settings NOTE To perform color registration verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette Q IMPORTANT Before performing color registration be sure to perform Calibration see page 9 25 If color drift remains perform color registration By performing color registration without performing Calibration the color drift will be resolved once however it may cause the serious color drift later Normal Registration 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scro
68. Settings 3 gt Job Accounting Settings gt Unknown ID Job Reject GB0434_00 NOTE You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 36 for the default login user name and password Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard Q oO oO N N QO a Oo el 2 Configure the function 10 10 Job Accounting O Print Accounting Report ff 1 2 Total Job Accounting Each Job Accounting Y GB0461_00 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting gt page 9 60 N Login Logout gt page 9 61 Adding an Account page 9 62 Editing and Deleting Accounts page 9 64 Restricting the Use of the Machine gt page 9 66 Counting the Number of Pages Printed gt page 9 68 Printing an Accounting Report gt page 9 70 Job Accounting Default Setting gt page 9 71 Unknown Login User Name Job page 9 72 9 59 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Enabling Disabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 59 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Job Accounting Off Print ACCOUNTING KeEpOrt Total Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461_00 2 Enable job accounting 10 10 booo 1 1 GB0462_00 NOTE When the display returns to the System Menu default screen logout is automatically executed
69. a scan resolution other than 3 44 sent from the machine on the Normal or 200 x 400dpi Super for the 200 x 100dpi Normal or 200 x 400dpi PC an image size is shrunk scan resolution Super when sending an image vertically or horizontally Offset occurs Run Drum Refresh 9 25 Increase the adjustment value for MC 9 25 setting Increase the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value If there is no improvement after the value is increased by 1 level increase by 1 level again If there is still no improvement return the setting to the original value Part of the image is Decrease the adjustment value for 9 25 periodically faint or blurred MC setting Decrease the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value If there is no improvement after the value is decreased by 1 level decrease by 1 level again If there is still no improvement return the setting to the original value mM Irregular horizontal lines Decrease the adjustment value for 9 25 appear in the image MC setting Decrease the adjustment value 1 level at a time from the current value If there is no improvement after the value is decreased by 1 level decrease by 1 level again If there is still no improvement return the setting to the original value The altitude is 1500 m or Set Altitude Adjustment to High 1 If 9 25 higher and irregular there is still no improvement change horizontal white l
70. and Hagaki and from Legal to Statement and 16K Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper Q IMPORTANT When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Quick Setup Wizard on page 3 29 If you are using a paper weight of 106 g m or more set the media type to Thick The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows e A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m recycled paper or color paper 50 sheets e Hagaki 15 sheet e OHP film 1 sheet e Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Monarch Youkei 4 Youkei 2 5 sheets e Heavy paper 128 to 220 g m 30 sheets NOTE When you load custom size paper enter the paper size by referring to Paper Size on page 9 8 When you use special paper such as thick paper select the media type by referring to Media Type on page 9 8 1 Adjust the multi purpose tray size When using legal size paper pull out the sub tray 3 6 Common Operations gt Loading Paper 2 Load paper Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops Q IMPORTANT Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up Curled paper must be uncurled before use Straighten the top edge if it is curled When loading paper int
71. and enter the number of jobs in the log history print You can enter any number between 1 and 16 Manual Log History Transmission You can also send the log history to the specified destinations ma 1 Display the screen Referring to Sending the Log History on Send the log history 2 System Menu Counter Send Log History Auto Sending 10 10 Destination E mail Job Log Subject GB0578_00 8 10 nually page 8 8 display the screen 2 gt Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Setting E mail Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E mail 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 8 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Send Log History Auto Sending Off Destination Job Log Subject GB0578_00 2 Enter an E mail subject Inputs l 1 Limit 60 GB0057_23 Up to 60 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 8 11 Status Job Cancel gt Check of Device Status Check of Device Status Configure the devices lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status You can also control devices depending on their status 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status status Job Cancel erro o o lA Send Job Log Bistore Job Log Print Jobs Status Job Cancel SS fere Running FAX Waiting
72. and media type for Cassette 1 to 3 and multi purpose 9 7 tray Common Settings Configures overall machine operation 9 9 Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen 9 9 Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations 9 9 Original Settings Configures settings for originals 9 9 Paper Settings Configures settings for paper 9 10 Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm up is completed 9 11 or the Reset key is pressed Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending Setting the frequently used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier Q IMPORTANT If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time 9 12 Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred 9 13 Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions 9 13 Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter 9 13 characters USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use 9 13 Copy Configures settings for copying functions 9 14 Send Configures settings for sending functions 9 14 Document Box Configures settings related to the Job Box and Sub Address Box For details on Job Box refer to Printing on page 5 1 and for details on Sub Add
73. and the screen to enter the Account ID appears To continue the operation enter the Account ID Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Login Logout If job accounting is enabled an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine Login 1 Enter the account ID 10 10 Enter the account ID Counter la el a If this screen is displayed during operations enter the account ID NOTE lf you entered a wrong character press the Clear key and enter the account ID again If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID a warning beep will sound and login will fail Enter the correct account ID By pressing Check Counter you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned 2 Log in 10 10 Enter the account ID When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears If user login administration is enabled the screen to enter the login user name and password appears Enter a login user name and password to login Refer to Login Logout on page 3 15 If the user has already registered the account information the account ID entry would be skipped Refer to Adding a User on page 9 36 Logout When the operations are complete press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen Logout 9 61 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Adding an Account This section explains how to add a new account The following en
74. cary B G E oO Oo When you select the wizard mode Ext Address Book gt _ Original Size A 1 2 ph f 1 6 One Touch Key gt m Original Orientation Top Edge on Left Address Entry E mail ca v __ Duplex 1 sided VY GB0767_00 GBO0769_00 EEJ lt Bag Razi gt Razi Select the function Checked items will be shown as part of the wizard NOTE When the job type is Copy the Destination Recall Method screen will not be displayed Use or os to scroll up and down 4 Enter a name Sending Job E mail Input20 1 Limit32 GB0057_80 cancel lt a Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N Common Operations gt Favorites 5 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Sending Job E mail Input20 Limit 32 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending 1 2 Number Auto Owner Admin l d GB0766_00 GB0057_ 81 Number Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending 1 2 Number Auto Owner Admin 1 VY d Permission 00 20 GB0766_00 GB0760_00 Select the item that you want to change 10 10 10 10 Permisson piae LA Destination Address Book Functions 2 Function Type Wizard Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they
75. case letters press a A To shift from upper case to lower case letters press A a 2 Enter A 1 INGEN 2 re es TES E ESE boa eh ae List A i Limit 32 by i ae z ABC Aa S GB0057_E13 GB0057_E14 To enter numbers or symbols press ABC to display Symbol 3 Register the characters you entered List A 1 EE a E Sm GB0057_E14 Press Next gt The entered characters are registered Appendix gt Paper Paper This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source Cassettes No of sheets 250 80 g m No of sheets Supported types Supported paper sizes Plain 60 g m to 163 g m Recycled 60 g m to 163 g m A4 B5 A5 Folio Legal Letter Oficio Il Statement Executive A6 B6 Envelope C5 16K Custom Optional paper feeder Supported types Supported paper sizes Plain 60 g m to 163 g m Recycled 60 g m to 163 g m Color 60 g m to 163 g m A4 B5 A5 Folio Legal Letter Statement Oficio Il Executive ISO B5 Envelope C5 16K Custom 500 80 g m Optional paper feeder multi purpose Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain 60 g m to 220 g m Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio II A4 A5 B5 Folio Recycled 60 g m to 220 g m 16K Color 60 g m to 220 g m 500 80 g m ISO B5 Envelope 6 Envelope C5 You
76. currently registered shortcut can be replaced with a new one 3 25 Common Operations gt Shortcuts Select the function 10 10 Paper Selection gJ Z p x GB0792_00 N Cancel lt Back Next gt i Select the function screen to display with the shortcut t 5 Enter the shortcut name Input 10 1 Limit24 GB0057_04 Up to 24 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters X G Register the shortcut Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 GB0793_00 l d Confirm the settings and press Save 3 26 Common Operations gt Shortcuts Editing and Deleting Shortcuts Change shortcut number name or delete shortcut 1 Display the screen 10 10 10 10 Copies 1 i Cy Original Size xE M4 n n T Original Orientation Paper A Zoom il Density Selection a A40 100 Normal 0 es a N Mre gt Color Selection Duplex Combine gp Collate Top Edge on Left Tih Full Color She Original Image gt 4 i 4 1 sided4 gt 1 sided Off On aed s Functions Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2 xv Favorites R ll Press Functions on the Copy Send or Document Box screen and then Add Edit Shortcut Add Edit Shortcut J GB0001_04 GB0002_00 Edit or delete a shortcut To edit a short
77. data from the computer the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically prints paper The options are between 5 and 495 seconds Value 5 to 495 seconds LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code character code OAH Value LF Only LF and CR Ignore LF CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code character code ODH Value CR Only LF and CR Ignore CR Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Paper Feed Mode Description While printing from the computer select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified Value Auto Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type Fixed Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source Gloss Mode Gloss Mode when set to High increases the effect of glossiness in printing by reducing the printing speed by half Value Low High Q IMPORTANT Gloss Mode is not available when Labels and Transparency is selected as the paper type setting Refer to Cassette MP Tray Settings on page 9 7 Depending on the paper used printing in gloss mode may cause wrinkle in paper To reduce wrinkle try using thicker paper Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Confi
78. data in Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Background Density Adj Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment Copy Auto Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Send Box Auto Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Toner Save Level EcoPrint Set the toner saving level when using EcoPrint Copy Lowers or raises the toner saving level during copying Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Value 1 to 5 Printer Lowers or raises the toner saving level during printing Adjustment can be made in 5 levels Value 1 to 5 Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white Value 5 B amp W 4 3 2 1 Color Correcting Black Line Correct fine lines streaks caused by contamination which may appear on the i
79. default password is admin00 The password can be changed For details refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 2 23 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail Sending E mail Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments To use this function this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments check the following e The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full time connection via a LAN is recommended e SMTP Settings Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server e If limits have been set on the size of E mail messages it may not be possible to send very large E mails 1 Display the screen Start Basic Printer Scanner Foam Jobs Document Box adeanced SMTP Login Menu Protocols TCP IP F AppleTalk MetBEUI Py E mail Recipient 1 L General E mail Recipient 1 E mail Recipient 2 E mail Recipient 3 SMTP Protocol O on off SMTP Port Number 25 SMTP Server Name 3 SMTP Server Timeout 10 seconds Authentication Protocol P en amp POP before SMT Management E mail Recipient 2 Authenticate as SMMP P E mail Recipient 3 LDAP Authentication F 2 POPS Account 1 POPS Account 2 POPS Account 3 mth ar
80. destination to which to send an image Select the destination using either of the following methods e Choosing from the Address Book page 6 15 e Choosing by One Touch Key page 6 77 e Entering a New E mail Address page 6 18 e Specifying a New PC Folder page 6 79 NOTE If you are using the products equipped with the fax function you can specify the fax destination Enter the other party s number using the numeric keypad Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book NOTE For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on page 6 24 For details on the External Address Book refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen 2 10 10 j__Dest _ A Recall Peale One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book a lt a s _ E mail Folder FAX SS ee Se GB0055_00 2 Select the destination Address Book All DA EI 123456 123456 10 10 Use V or AN to scroll up and down fod 123456 123 456789 c0 1 1 Jod 123456 12345 com f f f 3 fodi yee 123456 11111 com Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box e Ke N e a 0
81. displayed Description Select the default type of the files to be sent Value PDF TIFF JPEG XPS Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults Value Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left Collate Set the defaults for Collate Value Off On File Separation Select the default file separation setting Value Off Each Page Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution Value 600 x 600dpi 400 x 400dpi Ultra Fine 300 x 300dpi 200 x 400dpi Super Fine 200 x 200dpi Fine 200 x 100dpi Normal Color Selection Copy Select the default copying color mode setting Value Auto Color Full Color Black amp White Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Item Description Color Select Send Store Select the default color mode for scanning documents Value Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Full Color Grayscale Black amp White Original Image Set the default original document type Value Text Photo Photo Text Graphic Map Text for OCR Printer Output Background Density Adj Select the default value for background density adjustment Value Off Auto Manual Darker 5 EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default Value Off On Zoom Select the enlarged reduced default when paper size sending size changed after the originals set Value 100 Auto Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaults Value Off On Fi
82. e Thin paper from 60 g m to 64 g m or less e Letterhead e Colored paper e Prepunched paper e Envelopes e Cardstocks Hagaki e Thick paper from 106 g m to 220 g m or less e Labels e Coated paper e High quality paper When using these paper and media choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers such as laser printers Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies thick paper envelopes cardstocks and labels Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper Thus special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems Before purchasing special paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper Transparencies Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing Transparencies must meet the following conditions Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190 C Thickness 0 100 to 0 110 mm Material Polyester Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 To avoid problem
83. in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 36 Change the color mode Color Selection gt page 3 51 Select original image type for best results Original Image gt page 3 45 Save toner when printing EcoPrint gt page 4 13 Make a copy after changing the appearance of the original s colors Hue Adjustment gt page 4 14 Adjust colors for example by strengthening cyan or magenta tones Color Balance gt page 4 15 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness gt page 3 46 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 47 Make a copy with more vivid colors Saturation gt page 4 16 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan gt page 3 39 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice gt page 3 52 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry gt page 3 54 Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority Priority Override gt page 3 55 Copying gt Copying Functions Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image Auto A4 141 Adjusts the image to match the paper size Standard Zoom Adjusts the image to match present sizes Zoom Level Original Copy Model Zoom Level Original
84. information about functions and machine operation Closes the Help screen and returns to the original screen Paper Selection Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 LJ 2 A4 P A4 LJ Plain Plain 3 M A4 EF A4 EP Plain Plain GB0004_00 a Su Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Select the cassette or multi purpose tray with the desired paper size Auto Automatically selects the appropriate paper size Cassette 1 Selects the paper in cassette 1 Cassette 2 Selects the paper in cassette 2 Cassette 3 Selects the paper in cassette 3 Scrolls up and down when the help text cannot be displayed in its entirety on a single screen GH0001_00 3 31 Common Operations gt Canceling Jobs Canceling Jobs Cancel any print or send job being executed 1 Press the Stop key Stop 2 Cancel a job When there is a job is being scanned P A E m oe Scanned Pages 10 10 GB0222_01 Cancel Canceling will be displayed and the current job will be canceled When there is a job printing or on standby Ms 10 10 0095 E1doc0000952010092810 ws 1 3 GB0717_00 2 Displays details for individual jobs n Menu Select the job you wish to cancel and press Delete NOTE The current print job is temporarily interrupted Continues without temporarily interrupting jobs being sent You can also cancel executing jobs and jobs on standby after ch
85. m m r 1 Auto Standard Zoom gt Others gt Zoom Entry Enter the magnification H GB0005_00 Cancel Next gt t 4 6 GB0001_01 GB0005_00 GB0005_00 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 400 Max 200 1 2 141 A5 gt gt A4 100 V4 G Use V or AN to scroll up and down Ready to copy Full Color EL 10 10 25 400 A t aa GB0006_00 GB0007_00 Copying gt Copying Functions Duplex Copy 2 sided documents 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 2 sided to 2 sided Others Duplex 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided Prints 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Prints 2 sided to 2 sided Binding in Original If you choose a 2 sided sheet original select the binding edge of the originals If you choose a 2 sided copy select the binding edge of the finished copies Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction This item is not displayed when 1 sided gt gt 1 sided is selected NOTE The paper sizes supported in Two sided to Two sided a
86. nikae aaiae 3 3 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray nnannannennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnsnnnnrnennennnrrnnrrernnrrnrrsnrrernsrrnrrnnrnnrrnrrnnrrne 3 6 oddin CIMA araa E EE E A E E E O 3 10 Placing Originals on the Platen sxsicaucsauc dice sivaicdshueteeteaenens endeared seduaauvensivuniakwnwaydtwauantasuhivaaenindtivs Senamreawsunenieis 3 10 Loading Originals in the Document Processor cccccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeseaeeseeeeseeeesseeeseeeeeeeees 3 11 Checking the Equipment s Serial Number cece cece ceececeeeceeeceeeese ees eeseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeseueseeeseneeseeegeeegeeess 3 13 pole dale INO COUMO iieee een ern ne een eter een ee nee nes et ern eee ee E ee ee 3 14 LOA LOGOUT aeeneeee inter ete E ene E een ee ee eee ee 3 15 Fr AVIONICS Se cress E E A E annie seneensdean E 3 17 FREGISIENING Favorits sc ccccsceienecvaeinenasancalsdnonesdbuaddavtenenshesuieis tueneudlnebddclendsidesdieemseseaanendsedbecsndeuistiendeedeeselewaciond 3 17 ECMUNG and Deleting Favoritos setonvicosecesieresedesamriiaeodeunledad anepnsased i eE araa eiai 3 21 Uong FAVOS era erre a E T E R EE E EE 3 23 SMOC UNS eare E E E E EE E E E E E EET A 3 25 Registering SHOrTOUTS oct cettciewcastceoeecenmelcbeeeenmeetedenetinetics iA Oaa AEEA E Ea EAE ATER DA 3 25 Editing and Delstng SNOrCULS csahstainr enie inn e e ea aae AEE ETna ioe ENa Eae e 3 27 Bae ES e IS E E A AE A E aero E E E E A A E E A T E saeieensesteeee 3 28 Ee AESi ea A
87. of Device Status on page 8 12 N 1 2 Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 2 Display the screen 10 10 10 10 11 3 3 3PG J X 7 9 2 2PG 1 1 gt el 1 When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory screen may appear NOTE If the screen does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory GB0089_00 2 Select and open the folder in which the file you wish to print is stored The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root folder To return to a higher level folder press lt Back 3 Select the file 10 10 5 _ 113 36 MW 7 9 2 PG GB0089_02 Select the file to be printed and press Print 4 Enter the quantity Copies 1 A EF U aaa Paper gp Collate 73 Duplex Def Selection Lo b dH 1 4 AFD On _ 1 sided gt ee A U O n ox A lt F N O i GB0097_00 Functions Cancel NOTE Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity 1 3 GB0089_03 Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory 5 Select the functions 10 10 i Copics 1 Copies 1 Collate re Duplex 1 sided GB0097_00 Cancel Select the function to use for Document Box Press Functions to display other functions For details refer to Functions for Doc
88. of up to 100 individual accounts e Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 for security e Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID e Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined e Restricting the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies e Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup For details about the configuration method refer to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 59 1 Enable job accounting 10 10 On 1 1 GB0462_00 a k ws 2 Add an account System Menu Counter Q Gi Sales department 00000001 cm 10 10 1 1 oO 2 End t oO oO oO 3 Log out Logout 9 57 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 4 Other users login for operations Enter the account ID 10 10 Enter the account ID Check Login Counter GB0725_00 t 9 58 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting Settings 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down a lt gt System Menu Counter Bomen AM E Address Book One Touch 2 h 4 5 f z User Login Job Accounting 1 E Printer System Menu Counter 10 10 GB0054_03 User Login
89. on page 6 22 sending gt Specifying Destination Entering a New E mail Address Enter the desired e mail address NOTE Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e mail For details refer to COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail on page 2 23 1 3 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send l 10 10 ant l Dest 0 Recall Sises One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book m i E mail Folder FAX V M A Functions w Favorites GB0055_00 Enter destination E mail address Input 11 Limit 128 GB0057_07 Up to 128 characters can be entered To enter multiple destinations press Next Destination and enter the next destination Up to 100 E mail addresses can be specified Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters You can register the entered email address in the Address Book by pressing Menu and then Add to Address Book You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination Accept the destinations abc def com Input 1 Limit 128 QO Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 22 N 6 18 sending gt Specifying Destination Specifying a New PC Folder Specify either the desired shared folder on a computer or an FTP server as the destination NOT
90. read from the chart 10 10 I A 0 9 GB0644_01 l d Press to increase the value from 0 to 9 To decrease press By pressing the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters going from A to I To move in the reverse direction press You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registration values for each chart 6 Press Start after all values have been entered Color registration begins System Menu Counter 10 10 Cancel GB0643_01 7 Press OK after color registration is complete setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to login Access are in three levels User Administrator and Machine Administrator The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration For details about the configuration method refer to User Login Settings on page 9 33 1 Enable user login administration System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings 1 1 gt Local User Authorization Off GB0435_00 2 Add a user System Menu Counter A 7 a DeviceAdmin
91. roscaras7s Po ares P o Ae a r aan et es MH 9 Bh feed ct ery Bones oe peek ye atcirs IGECA13579 ii ii ii wt CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5 aang es eahar ee eae ee ae ora IGECA13579 i i i il Mi i il wn i i Mi i CH 6 CH 7 en rn PAu re reBCAI3573 pee nr HFDBO0246 wi wt ily ll qq YH 1 YH 2 YH 3 YH 4 YH 5 I1GECATI35 79 IGECA13579 IGECA13579 TGEBCAL35 79 IGECA13579 HFDBO0O246 8 HFDBO0O24 68 HFDBO2 468 HFDBO0O246 8 HFDBO0O24 68 YH 6 YH 7 YH 8 IGECA13579 TIGECAL35 79 IGECA13579 HFDB0246 8 HFDBO0O0246 8 HFDBOQ246 8 in z l ONUNWEDOAMAH WoNunNweEPaAWAH OnFANOWUND MITI ONUNWEPAHMAH woNuUwrPPQOWAH ON UWP PAMAH Q HIE 2 Tl WIN UWE PAWAH WONMOWEPAWMQH OnNANOWUMD MITI ONU wWEPNAHAQH oN UwWwbrPEPOWAH ONUWPREPOQWAH K Il wINUwWPEPAAAH WONUNwWEPAWMAH OnPNOWUND WIN UWE PANWQH WwNuUWEPAAQH ONUWREPOAWAH 3 Enter the appropriate value 1 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match If this is the O position registration for that color is not required For the illustration B is the appropriate value IGECAI13579 HFDBO2 468 I G E C A ul 3 5 ONS NOWUD From charts V 1 to V 5 read only the values from V 3 center 9 30 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Menu Counter 10 10 GB0641_00 GB0642_01 3 Select the chart to be corrected 10 10 Cancel GB0643_01 4 Press or to enter the values
92. selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established E mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E mail that can be sent in kilobytes When the value is 0 no maximum size is set Sender Address Enter the E mail address of the person responsible for the machine such as the machine administrator so that a reply or non delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters Signature Enter the signature The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E mail body It is often used for further identification of the machine The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters Domain Restriction 3 Click Submit Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters You can also specify E mail addresses 2 25 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail 2 26 3 Common Operations This chapter explains the following topics LO AGING AIDCM oer uesarsncuasus lotscmas seat hioesimwaterasaapancuasseyeletedand E E 3 2 Belgro Loading Paper sete csciersemteasedatte neue ieee enn NE E ETENEE rare E SOE E Ea E SEEEN 3 2 Loading Paper in the CaSSCUCS ascssirnrssnreisinciaie caan a aiea Aae
93. setting to On Has the Host Name been entered properly Check the name of the computer to which data is being sent Has the Path been entered properly Check the share name for the shared folder Has the Login User Name been entered properly Check the domain name and login user name Has the same domain name been used for the Host Name and Login User Name Delete the domain name and backslash from the Login User Name Has the Login Password been entered properly Check the login password 6 19 Have exceptions for Windows Firewall been configured properly Configure exceptions for Windows Firewall properly 6 11 6 14 Do the time settings for the equipment domain server and data destination computer differ Set the equipment domain server and data destination computer to the same time Is the touch panel displaying Send error Refer to Responding to Send Error You can also enter a full computer name as the host name for example pc0O01 abcdnet com You can also enter login user names in the following formats Domain_name user_name for example abcdnet james smith User_name domain_name for example james smith abcdnet 10 12 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Responding to Error Messages If the touch panel displays any of these messages follow the corresponding procedure A Error Mess
94. setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Enabling Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration Select one of the following authentication methods Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 33 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings gt Local User Authorization Off GB0435_00 2 Select the authentication method 10 10 Local Authentication Network Authentication gt a d When selecting Network Authentication GB0436_00 Select the server type 10 10 10 10 Server Type Kerberos Host Name Domain Name 2 GB0437_00 GB0438_00 l d el Enter the host name 10 10 2 Inputs Limit 64 Server Type Kerberos Domain Name 1 GB0437_00 GB0057_24 d Up to 64 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 9 34 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Enter a domain name System Menu Counter 10 10
95. sheets min Legal 23 sheets min First Print Time Black amp White When using the document processor 11 seconds or less A4 feed from When the document processor is not used 10 seconds or less Cassette Color When using the document processor 13 seconds or less When the document processor is not used 12 seconds or less Warm up Time Power on 29 seconds or less 22 C 71 6 F 60 Sleep 20 seconds or less Paper Capacity Cassette 250 sheets 80 g m Multi Purpose Tray 50 sheets 80 g m7 plain paper Output Tray Capacity 150 sheets 80 g m Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets can be set in one sheet increments 11 18 Appendix gt Specifications Description FS C2526MFP FS C2626MFP Image Write System Semiconductor laser Main Memory Standard 1024 MB Maximum 2048 MB Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed USB Host 2 Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T Option eKUIO slot 1 Resolution 600 x 600 dpi Operating Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Environment Humidity 15 to 80 Altitude 8 200 feet 2 500 m or less Brightness 1 500 lux or less Dimension W x D x H 20 15 64 x 21 42 64 x 23 3 4 514 x 550 x 603 mm Weight with toner container 84 92 b 38 6 kg 85 14 b 38 7 kg Space Required W x D 20 15 64 x 29 1 2 514 x 750 mm with Multi Purpose Tray expanded
96. temperature around 60 8 to 80 6 F or less 16 to 27 C humidity around 36 to 65 In addition Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine e Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight e Avoid locations with vibrations e Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations e Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air e Avoid poorly ventilated locations If the floor is delicate against casters when this machine is moved after installation the floor material may be damaged During copying some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated Precautions for Use Cautions when handling consumables A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box avoid inhalation and ingestion as well as contact with your eyes and skin e If you do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water
97. the account Account Name 10 10 2 Inputg x Limit 32 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total Off Print Full Color Off GB0478_00 GB0057_65 Account ID System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 Account Name Section 01 1 l 0 99999999 Account ID 00000001 00000001 1 2 ose Print Total Off 2 Print Full Color Off T GB0476_00 GB0478_00 a Cancel 9 64 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Restriction System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Off Counter Limit Print Total Off Reject Usage Print Full Color Off Cancel e System Menu Counter 10 10 GB0478_00 Scan Others Off Use M or A to scroll up and down FAX Transmission Off el For details refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 66 GB0478_01 3 Register the account System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total Off Print Full Color Off Cancel GB0478_00 To delete System Menu Counter x Q ia fit Sales department 00000001 cm 1 1 1 amp GB0473_00 Menu Select the account name you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon 9 65 10 10 a d GB0474_00 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting
98. the image quality level PDF Saves or sends a PDF file You can specify the format that comply with PDF A TIFF Saves or sends a TIFF file JPEG Saves or sends a JPEG file Each page will be saved individually XPS Saves or sends a file in XPS Others File Format Select from PDF TIFF JPEG and XPS Image Quality Set the image quality from 1 to 5 Low Quality High Quality PDF A Set PDF A from PDF A 1a and PDF A 1b This setting is displayed only when PDF has been selected as the file format 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen Send Ready to send 10 10 EEE ae Dest 0 Recall Check File Format f CX original SIZe X 2 A4 One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book ve lt gt lt palnallOnenttion a a EE Edge on Left Duplex 1 sided Close Add Edil Shortcu Use V or AN to scroll up and down z T E mail Folder FAX M GB0055_00 GB0081_00 Scan to USB Ready to store in Box 10 10 LS Resolution 1 sided 300x300dpi i MO ery Density Le File Name zm abf Entry Normal 0 doc Functions Cancel GB0096_00 3 49 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Select the file format PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS Ready to send 10 10 gt g d oO Others 1 Ready to send 10 10 JPEG
99. the paper size XPS Fit to Page page 7 12 When storing a document to USB memory What do you want to do Reference Page Select the file format for images being stored File Format page 3 49 Automatically scan 2 sided originals Duplex page 3 37 Set the resolution at which to scan originals Scan Resolution gt page 3 44 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 43 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry gt page 3 54 Specify the original size Original Size gt page 3 35 Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 36 Change the size at which to store an image Storing Size gt page 7 13 Change the color mode for images being stored Color Selection gt page 3 51 Select original image type for best results Original Image gt page 3 45 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness gt page 3 46 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust page 3 47 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the storing size Zoom page 3 48 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan page 3 39 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice gt page 3 52 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Duplex Print a document
100. touch panel does not Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet 2 11 respond when the main power switch is turned on Pressing the Start key does Is there a message on the touch Determine the appropriate response to 10 73 not produce copies panel the message and respond accordingly Is the machine in Sleep mode Press the Power key to recover the 2 21 machine from Sleep mode The machine will be ready to copy within 20 seconds Cannot print Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet 2 11 Is the machine powered on Turn on the main power switch 2 13 Are the printer cable and network Connect the correct printer cable and 2 10 cable connected network cable securely Was the machine powered on before Power on the machine after 2 10 the printer cable was connected connecting the printer cable Is the print job paused Resume printing 8 3 Blank sheets are ejected Are the originals loaded correctly When placing originals on the platen 3 10 place them face down and align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the 3 12 document processor place them face up Check that the application software is correctly operated Paper often jams Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly 3 2 Is the paper of the supported type Is it Remove the paper turn it over and 3 2 in good condition reload it Is the paper curled folded or wrinkled Repla
101. using or installing the device drivers and Software in you agree to become boun and conditi his L lease open and read Select Language c 2011 KYOCERA MITA Corporation www kyoceramita com a EE ooo Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement 2 15 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software 3 Install using Express Mode 1 Select the print system to be installed Installer Installer Discover Printing System 2 Choose the printing system you would like to install Install the recommended printing software The printing system must be connected Custom Mode Create a custom installation Utilities Install printing system utilities only Installer Printer Settings Type a name for your printer Some programs do not support printer and server name combinations longer than 31 characters Printing system name Share your printer with other users To share this printer type a share name __ O o M Set as default printer ORKYOCERA 3 Start installing Installer Confirm Settings Confirm your installation settings Click Back to make changes I I To start the installation click Install KYOCERA NOTE The machine cannot be detected unless it is on If the computer fails to detect the machine verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it
102. weight 44 to 74 g m Basis weight overall paper weight 104 to 151 g m Top sheet thickness 0 086 to 0 107 mm Overall paper thickness 0 115 to 0 160 mm Moisture content 4 to 6 composite 11 15 Appendix gt Paper Hagaki Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray fan them and align the edges If the Hagaki paper is curled straighten it before loading Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki available at post offices Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Envelopes Envelopes should always be fed from the multi purpose tray or paper feeder multi purpose with the print side up If you use envelopes quite often we recommend to use the paper feeder multi purpose Due to the structure of envelopes printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through Before purchasing envelopes in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled Thus keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them Keep the following points in mind e Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive In addition do not use the t
103. 0 sending gt Specifying Destination 5 Accept the destinations Ready to send 10 10 Host Name abc Menu Cancel O Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 22 Q N z e a 0 6 21 sending gt Specifying Destination Checking and Editing Destinations Check and edit a selected destination 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Specifying Destination on page 6 15 specify the destination Ready to send 10 10 Se ae r _ m a One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book a Vv E mail Folder GB0055_02 Check and edit the destination Deletes the selected destination 10 10 Adds a new destination BBB bbb abc com Scrolls up and down when the list of destinations cannot be displayed in its entirety on a single screen GB0105_00 Displays details for the destinations New E mail addresses and PC folders can be edited if they have been specified 6 22 sending gt Specifying Destination Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending You can specify destinations that combine e mail addresses folders SMB or FTP and fax numbers This is referred to as Multi Sending This is useful for sending to different types of destination e mail addresses folders etc in a single operation Fax functionality can only be used on products equipped with fax capability No of broadcas
104. 003 y 123456 12345 com a 004 123456 11111 com om OK Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations on page 6 22 Q e Ko N x oO a O 6 16 sending gt Specifying Destination Choosing by One Touch Key Select the destination using the One Touch Keys NOTE For more information on adding One Touch keys refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 6 33 Display the screen 1 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen 2 10 10 Dest 0 Check ras Recall ae One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book _ FAX V vy OA Ye Favorites E mail Folder s Functions Select the destination Ready to send 10 10 006 None 1 9 007 None 009 None 010 None 012 No Cancel lt GB0095_00 GB0055_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Press the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered Multiple One Touch Keys can be selected You can specify a one touch key by one touch number by pressing the Quick No Search key Accept the destination Ready to send 10 10 one 003 None 004 None 005 None 006 None 7 1 9 007 None 008 None 009 None 010 None 011 None 012 None Cancel N GB0095_00 Destinations can be changed later Refer to Checking and Editing Destinations
105. 1 7 for details on entering characters Document Box gt Functions for Document Box JPEG TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image Print Resolution Fit the image size to the print resolution 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen Ready to print from Box g 10 10 Ready to print from Box 10 10 F E Copies 1 f Um 1 E eA 2 e JPEG TIFF Print m AX q5 aan g Collate L Duplex apei ole election i d XPS Fit to Page A4 D On _ 1 sided LA Add Edi Shortcut GB0097_00 GB0099_01 Cancel Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 n f Image Resolution Print Resolution GB0101_00 E e l e Document Box gt Functions for Document Box XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS files 1 2 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen Ready to print from Box 10 10 Copies RS wee Paper S Duplex Selection A4 MD 1 rr Select the function Ready to print from Box 10 10 a el Cancel
106. 1 bit 256 gray levels including white and black for 8 bits and 65 536 gray levels for 16 bits Help A Help key is provided on this machine s operation panel If you are unsure of how to operate the machine would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly press the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel IP Address An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots e g 192 168 110 171 Each number should be between 0 and 255 IPP IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HT TP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption KPDL Kyocera Page Description Language Kyocera s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3 11 23 Appendix gt Glossary Multi Purpose MP Tray The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes Hagaki transparencies or labels NetBEUI Net
107. 1 sided or 2 sided Select the original binding orientation and desired final binding orientation ar aA 2 sided Print a 2 sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the left or right 2 sided Print a 2 sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the top y 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen 2 a r Paper 7D Collate Selection i A40 On N GB0097_00 s Functions Cancel 2 Select the function 10 10 Ea Ee 1 sided 2 sided 2 sided GB0065_00 E L Su Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Encrypted PDF Password Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory on page 7 2 display the screen Ready to print from Box 10 10 Ready to print from Box 10 10 Copies L _ a A lt Color Selection cS 73 e Full Color q Paper g Collate Me Duplex Selection Job Finish Notice L gt off A4 D On 1 sided D O goed Override off 2 a Encrypted PDF Password ad Off Close Add Edi Shortcut GB0097_00 GBO0099_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Inputa 1 Limit256 GB0057_21 Up to 256 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 1
108. 43 SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 22 Value Off On Port 1 65535 Raw Port Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port Value Off On ThinPrint UG 33 Select whether or not to use ThinPrint When selecting On set the default ThinPrint Port Number Use the ThinPrint default port 4000 Value Off On Port 1 65535 ThinPrintOverSSL UG 33 Select whether or not to use ThinPrintOverSSL SSL must be set to On in SSL on page 9 22 Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON 9 20 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu NetWare Description NetWare Select the NetWare network connection After that select frame types for NetWare network from Auto Ethernet ll 802 3 802 2 or SNAP Value Off On Frame Type Auto 802 3 Ether ll 802 2 SNAP After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON AppleTalk Item Description AppleTalk Select the Apple Talk network connection Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON WSD Scan Item Description Select whether or not to use WSD Scan Value Off On After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON WSD Print Item Description Select whether or not to use WSD Print Value Off On
109. 45_00 Save e Editing and Deleting Users User properties can be changed and users can be deleted 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 33 display the screen setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List 1 1 Simple login settings gt Local User Authorization Simple Login Simple Login Setup 1 1 Off GB0435_00 GBO0710_01 2 Edit or delete a user To edit a user 1 Select the user whose information you wish to edit and press Menu and then Edit 10 10 R 10 10 Zbl bi ae j ret 01User 4 02 User C 1 lt g OA ee 3 fi 03 User D 04User E 1 1 gt 05 None Delete 07 None i 2 Edit the user GBO0712_01 GB0738_00 Name System Menu Counter 10 10 Input Limit 32 Name User A User User A Password Login off Icon Male 1 S GB0739_00 GB0057_62 User System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Name User af Password Login off Icon Male 1 e Select the user to use for simple logins from Local User or Network User Local User Network User GB0739_00 GB0740_00 Password Login 10 10 User Password Login Icon Sj p ad O oO Cancel 014 a f a oO oO 9 49 setup Registration
110. 5 POP3 11 24 POP3 E mail RX Protocol Detail 9 20 PostScript 11 24 Power Cable Connecting 2 11 Power Cord Connector 2 4 Index 3 Power Off 2 13 Power On 2 13 PPM 11 24 Precautions for Use 1 3 Preparing Cables 2 9 Preprinted Paper 11 16 Preset Limit 9 12 Printer Driver 11 24 Installing 2 15 Printer Settings Color Setting 9 16 Copies 9 16 CR Action 9 16 Duplex 9 16 EcoPrint 9 16 Emulation 9 16 Form Feed TimeOut 9 16 Gloss Mode 9 17 LF Action 9 16 Orientation 9 16 Override A4 Letter 9 16 Paper Feed Mode 9 17 Wide A4 9 16 Printing 5 1 Printing Speed 11 18 11 19 Priority Override 3 55 Q Quick Setup Wizard 3 29 R RA Stateless 11 24 Setup 9 19 Raw Port Protocol Detail 9 20 Rear Cover 2 4 Rear Cover Lever 2 4 Recycled Paper 1 12 11 17 Regarding Trade Names 1 9 Report Print 9 5 Accounting Report 9 6 Font List 9 5 Network Status 9 5 Service Status 9 6 Status Page 9 5 Resolution 11 19 Restart 9 4 Result Report Settings 9 6 Right Cover 2 4 S Safety Conventions in This Guide 1 2 Saturation 4 16 Scan Resolution 3 44 Secure Protocol 9 22 Send as E mail 6 2 11 24 E mail Subject Body 6 40 Sending 6 1 Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 6 5 Send as E mail 6 2 Send to Folder SMB FTP 6 2 sending E mail 2 24 Sending Size 6 37 send Settings Color TIFF Compression 9 14 Default Screen 9 14 Dest Check before Send 9 14 Entry Check for New Dest 9 14 Send and Forward 9 14 Serial Num
111. 578_00 GB0581_00 2 Select the destination Select from the Address Book Searches by destination name System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 2 Q Address Book ww aaa abc com Ext Address Book 1 p bbb abc com i 1 1 gt 1 1 Address Entry gt ccc abc com ddd abc com Cancel GB0583_00 GB0398_01 J Allows you to search for and sort destinations Displays details for individual destinations Enter a new e mail address System Menu Counter 10 10 Input 11 Limit 128 Address Book i Ext Address Book 1 gt 1 1 Address Entry gt PT Up to 128 characters can be entered GB0583_00 GB0057_22 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters 3 Accept the destination System Menu Counter 10 10 abc def com GB0581_01 Menu Cancel t Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Automatic Log History Transmiss ion This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 8 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Send Log History Auto Sending Destination Job Log Subject 2 Select the function 10 10 Off On J 1 1 1 E l d GB0578_00 GB0579_00 System Menu Counter 10 10 GB0580_00 Press On
112. 57_30 Administrator User Local Authorization e Select the user access privilege GB0446_01 GB0443_00 a T 9 38 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration My Panel 10 10 10 10 E mail Address Access Level My Panel Local Authorization Language English Default Screen Shortcut Shared Shortcut GB0446_01 O For details on My Panel refer to My Panel on page 9 41 N Local Authorization System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 E mail Address Access Level User Printer Printer Full Color Copy Full Color Cancel Cancel ave GB0446_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Change the limitations as needed 4 Register the user Select the item that you want to change 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password ena A A Et Account Name Others GB0446_00 9 39 GB0749_00 GB0839_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Local User Authorization Enables local user authorization Job use can be prohibited for specific users Set when adding a user see page 9 36 or editing and deleting users see page 9 42 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 33 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings gt Local Use
113. 8 Select the file format for images being sent or stored File Format gt page 3 49 Change the color mode Color Selection gt page 3 51 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice gt page 3 52 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry gt page 3 54 Suspend the current job and override it to give a new job top priority 3 34 Priority Override page 3 55 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Size 00683 USB Specify the original size to be scanned Metric Select from A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 or Folio Inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio II Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 or Custom For instructions on how to specify the custom original size refer to Custom Original Size on page 9 9 NOTE Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size originals 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Size 10 10 10 10 Copies l Eo E ee py Original Size Paper Ba Zoom H Density sa Aa fT Selection ra Original Orientation A40 100 Normal 0 gt j 2 Top Edge on Left m p er Duplex Combine gp Collate _ Color S
114. AN Cable Connection Create a shared folder on the destination computer 6 7 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 6 15 Loading Originals 3 10 wer a u Saving Documents Operation Sending 6 2 to USB Memory Scan to USB 7 5 If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send by entering the address directly viii To send a FAX Only on products with the fax function installed A It faxes As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines you can also send a FAX via a network l 2A NOTE For more information on setting up and sending a FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide Administrator tasks ae you want Send a FAX FAX directly from a computer Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine Selection of Telephone Line Inch version only Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer f Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 1 Sse ene pean we inte gt oes eased dew cases mags yeas eee Loading Paper 3 2 Operation FAX Operation Network FAX Operation For more information refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send the FAX by entering the address directly Kk Menu Map Co py Copies page 4 3 Paper Selection page 3 47 Zoom page 4 5 Density page 3 43
115. Application Default Screen page 9 75 Application page 9 15 Internet Proxy page 9 75 Address Book One Touch Address Book page 6 24 One Touch Key page 6 33 Address Book Defaults Sort Print List refer to Fax Operation Guide User Login Job Accounting User Login Settings User Login page 9 34 page 9 32 Local User List page 9 36 Simple login settings Simple Login page 9 45 page 9 45 Simple Login Setup page 9 45 Local User Authorization page 9 40 Group Authorization Group Authorization page 9 57 Set page 9 57 Group List page 9 57 Obtain NW User Property page 9 55 Job Accounting Job Accounting page 9 60 Settings page 9 57 l Print Accounting Report page 9 70 Total Job Accounting Printed Pages page 9 68 page 9 68 Scanned Pages page 9 68 FAX TX Pages page 9 68 FAX TX Time page 9 68 Counter Reset page 9 68 Each Job Accounting page 9 68 Accounting List page 9 62 Default Setting page 9 Apply Limit page 9 71 71 Copier Printer Count page 9 71 Default Counter Limit page 9 71 Unknown ID Job page 9 72 xvii Printer page 9 76 Emulation page 9 76 Color Setting page 9 76 EcoPrint page 9 76 Override A4 Letter page 9 76 Duplex page 9 76 Copies page 9 16 Orientation pa
116. BIOS Extended User Interface An interface developed by IBM in 1985 as an update from NetBIOS It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP IP etc It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS 2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services NetWare Novell s network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems PDF A This is ISO 19005 1 Document management Electronic document file format for long term preservation Part 1 Use of PDF PDF A and is a file format based on PDF 1 4 It has been standardized as ISO 19005 1 and is a specialization of PDF which has been mainly used for printing for long term storage A new part ISO 19005 2 PDF A 2 is currently being prepared POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 A standard protocol to receive E mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems It enables flexible font functions and highly functional graphics allowing higher quality printing The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985 followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two byte languages e g Japanese in 1990 In 1996 Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF
117. Copies s r eee Background Density Adj Paper Zoom al Density a Su AN q aper B Selection a Saturation 2 A4 1100 Normal 0 iM 0 cc r w M a Mre D gg Continuous Scan Duplex DW combine gp Collate z JOD Finisn Notice CC z4 i 6 1 sidedsl gt 1 sided Off On GB0001_01 GB0002_02 Add Edi z Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 GB0043_00 3 Scan the originals Load the original and press the Start key to start scanning Once the original has been scanned load the next original and press the Start key Use the same procedure to scan any remaining originals 3 39 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 4 Finish scanning Place the originals and press Start key Job No 0003 Job Name doc00000320101010101010 Scanned Pages GB0222_00 Start copying sending or storing 3 40 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Paper Selection copy USB Select the cassette or multi purpose tray that contains the required paper size NOTE Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette refer to Quick Setup Wizard on page 3 29 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen 2 Press Paper Selection 10 10 Copies a E Paper A Zoom m Density Selection pal A40 100 Normal 0 s Fe a es O
118. DVDs Displays Keyboard Mouse Print amp Fax Sound Stabe Paced Internet amp Wireless 1 2 A 0 a MobileMe Network Bluetooth Sharing v Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences System y E Default printer Last Printer Used 4 t B hog d 1 22 e dy J Default paper size A4 3 Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine Universal Controls Update Access D Click the lock to prevent further changes 2 Click the IP icon for an IP connection or the AppleTalk icon for an AppleTalk connection and then enter the IP address and printer name 0 Add Printer Address 192 168 48 21 Valid and camniete address Queue m Leave blank for default queue Name 192 168 48 21 3 Print Using iyema i s J Gmmnticcmitiie 4 3 Select the options available for the machine and click Continue Installable Options 192 168 48 21 Make sure your printer s options are accurately shown here so you can take full advantage of them For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the documentation that came with it Paper Feeders Not Installed 1 1 Optional Disk Not Installed 3 4 The selected machine is added aan Print amp Fax 192 168 47 21 192 168 47 21 Idle Last Used Adobe PDF 7 0 oe o paused i Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies
119. Default Setting Sets default settings related to job accounting Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 59 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Apply Limit Subsequently Individual 1 1 Accounting List Default Setting gt GB0461_01 GB0481_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Setting Items Description Apply Limit This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction Value Immediately Job stops when the counter reaches its limit Subsequently Printing scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message Copier Printer Count You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 66 Counting the Number of A Pages Printed on page 9 68 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 9 70 for details Value Total Individual Default Counter Limit When you add a new account you can change the default restrictions on the number of pages used Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 66 Value 1 to 9 999 999 in 1 sheet increments The next job will be prohibited in sending or in st
120. E Refer to Creating a Shared Folder on page 6 7 for details on how to share a folder Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On For details refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 sail Dest 0 i Check Recall One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book my w g Folder FAX V E mail GB0055_00 2 Select the folder type 10 10 SMB Path Entry FTP Path Entry GB0103_00 PT 3 Enter the destination information Inputd Limit64 Enter the next information Once you have entered one item press Next to advance to the next item For send to folder SMB Data to be entered Max characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to receive Up to 64 characters the data Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows Up to 128 characters For example User ScanData 6 19 sending gt Specifying Destination Data to be entered Max characters Login User Name User name to access the PC Up to 64 characters Domain name User name For example abcdnet james smith User name Domain name For example james smith abcdnet Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64 characters For send to folder FTP Data to be entered Max characters Host Name Host name or IP address of FT
121. E 8 1 CCHVO CHIC JOD NAUS seire eidi nana e EE EE aa ase 8 2 Details of the Status Screens cc ccccecccsccsseeceeeceneceeeceeeceeceuecseecaeeceuecseeesaeessessnans 8 3 Checking Jon FISIO sexciecectinc sen sence ascent wmsssecenctepsseser E EE E E dees 8 7 Sending the Log HISTOY sesscceece0cc2eacdesstdecesesceseventsesesevencascceecduadsseedsnnsasutnandeaenadeancuenoneddactseces 8 8 Setting the Destination 2 0 00 cc ccccecccsscceeeceeeecueecececeuecaeecaeecseeceueseueesseesseessgesaaeeseess 8 9 Automatic Log History Transmission c ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeseeeseeeseueesueeaeeeseeess 8 10 Manual Log History Transmission ccccccseccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeneees 8 10 Setting E mail SUDJECU on csicccdesncdscevesdscemaevease cedeadaedebehdovasansosentaarnsesesvassuxaneredebessencaress 8 11 Check of Device StatUS srcaceccietssers deca ssucnaena aana adia an Nani e aa a aada 8 12 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper cccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeas 8 14 Setup Registration and User Managemen csseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 1 VOT TM hada tdie cies Saat vetcctndd ctdeca E E E R beuessnes E 9 2 Operation WISIN OG sisi ca ce iccenmssaeueuieasand cada cece EEEa E Nai 9 2 SYSTEM Menu Settings ccccccescccseecseeceecceseecaeeceecaeeeeeecaeecaeeseeecaeesseesagesaeeeseeeseeees 9 3 Eoi elte EEEE E E ast potas A E NE AE E P E A 9 5 RODO eeruan rT NE E E
122. E E E E E 11 22 Appendix gt Optional Equipment Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine Gigabit Ethernet Board Paper Feeder Paper Feeder The optional paper feeder for plain paper and paper feeder multi purpose for multiuse media will each hold approximately 500 sheets of paper 80 g m Up to 2 optional feeders can be installed in the machine Loading method is the same as Cassettes 1 NOTE To allow paper to be removed when a paper jam occurs there is a cover rear cover on the rear side of the paper feeder Q IMPORTANT When using the paper feeder be sure to replace the cover Appendix gt Optional Equipment Expansion Memory To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print soeed you can plug in optional memory module dual in line memory module in the memory slot provided on the main controller board You can select additional memory module from 256 512 or 1024 MB The maximum memory size is 2048MB Precautions for Handling the Memory Module KX Incorrect To protect electronic parts discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe faucet or other large metal object before handling the memory module Or wear an antistatic wrist strap if possible when you install the memory module Installing the Memory Module 1 Power off Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord an
123. EE E oat 7 9 Encrypted PDF TS SUV OIC ae sisters ap teertatarne hares ee ae hse EE once Ea E aaen Ea a Ea ranea nE 7 10 JPE STIFF AWM gee tecentctces E E yesacanyad sasadeorsseeqaasne sea E R 7 11 DO IC OP AOC aeee oeecuaeuetectecede E EE Am cectna tar EEE e EE E ES EAE a EA EEE 7 12 SONG AE Siac aauscosencsareaced E E E A E 7 13 1 1 Document Box gt Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer The following file types can be printed e PDF file Version 1 5 e TIFF file TIFF V6 TTN2 format e JPEG file e XPS file e Encrypted PDF file PDF files you wish to print should have an extension pdf Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used 1 Plug the USB memory Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot When the message Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files Are you sure is displayed press Yes Q IMPORTANT Use USB memory formatted by this machine If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used The removable memory is not formatted may appear Refer to Check
124. FAX Operation Guide Describes fax functionality Card Authentication Kit B Operation Describes how to authenticate to the machine using the ID card Guide KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Describes how to access the machine from a computer via a Web browser to check and Operation Guide change settings Printer Driver Operation Guide Describes how to install the printer driver and use printer functionality Network FAX Driver Operation Guide Describes how to install and use the network fax driver in order to use network fax functionality KM NET for Direct Printing Operation Describes how to use functionality for printing PDF files without launching Adobe Guide Acrobat or Reader KMnet Viewer User Guide Describes how to monitor the network printing system with KMnet Viewer PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Describes the native printer language PRESCRIBE commands Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Describes PRESCRIBE command functionality and control for each type of emulation Reference Contents 1 BE SS aaa cn eee attic ri sae invari OTE EE EEAO EE EEEE 1 1 NOUCO a cetera sacs a eni E EE E E atone sient ecaecdnn aseie gat E E EE A E 1 2 Safety Conventions in This Guide cccccccseeceececseeceeeceaeeceeesaeeeeaeeseeeseesaeeeseeesagees 1 2 AALE D LEL EPESA EIA E EAA E EN E AE IA I EEA 1 3 Procautons Tor S ea cece eysce iin n on E r E te oats AE S 1 3 Legal Restriction ON Copying Scanning
125. From the Start menu select Network 2 Install the driver Right click the machine s icon and then click Install NOTE lf the User Account Control window appears click Continue If the Found New Hardware window appears click Cancel During the installation double click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver Software Installation screen When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the screen the installation is completed Using WSD 1 Press the Send key Send 2 Place the originals For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 10 6 42 Sending gt WSD Scan 3 Display the screen Ready to send 10 10 IReady to send 000 O to send i 10 10 m l pesta 0 Dest 0 Recall La ESE al Sar Check ae er r WD a AW WSD Scan 2 One Touch One Touch Key j Address Book Ext Address Book E mail GB0055_00 4 Scan the originals Procedure using this machine Ready to send 10 10 From Computer From From operaton pene O Panel E l Su GB0648_00 2 Select the destination computer 10 10 Reload Cancel GB0649_00 Updates the list Displays information for individual destination computers 3 Press the Start key Start Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated 6 43 GBO0055_01 Sending gt WSD Scan Procedure from Your Computer Ready to send 10 10 From Computer
126. Full Color Off 3 S d E e l J Eo l j Restrictions System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Oil Account ID 00000001 Counter Limit Print Total Reject Usage Print Full Color 2 GB0480_00 a el H 2 T System Menu Counter Scan Others Off Use V or A to scroll up and down FAX Transmission Off GB0480_01 e For details refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 66 4 Register the account System Menu Counter 10 10 Account Name Section 01 Account ID 00000001 Print Total O ff Print Full Color off Cancel GB0480_00 9 63 GB0057_64 GB0476_00 2 5 N t So ao Oo Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Editing and Deleting Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 59 display the screen 2 VeTAUIT SETLING gt GB0461_01 2 Edit or delete an account To edit an account 1 Press for the account name you wish to edit Q w A fit Sales department 00000001 10 10 _ Searches by account name gt 1 1 GB0473_00 e Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results You can specify an account name by account ID by pressing the Quick No Search key 2 Edit
127. However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help e The use of a non shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited CAUTION The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device contains the module which complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS Gen of IC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Radio Tag Technology In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted Other precautions for users in California the United Stat
128. Human Services in 1968 This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance The laser optical system enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers never permits the laser beam to escape 2 The CDRH Act A laser product related act was implemented on Aug 2 1976 by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration FDA This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U S without certification and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug 1 1976 The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States On this machine the label is on the rear SS FS C2526MFP MFP MFP BERR RRERRERRR SE 3 Optical unit When checking the optical unit avoid direct exposure to the laser beam which is invisible Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit ANGER GLASS ERIMSBLELASER ATTENZIONE EPSO MAMARE EE BT RAAT aE S A Me eo AY s SSE 10 siz aa AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO AS TRR AARE AERA E RE m 3 BA A T R O E m ATTENTION CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE Sa AAEN DARAS IGA LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D OUVERTURE LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE SIH RTES AA Ra ime A REIT EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU EVITAR E
129. IRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 1 10 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 9 Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging Under the terms of this License Agreement you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from Mono
130. If coughing develops contact a physician e lf you do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician e lf you do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician e If toner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose MP Tray return it to its original package and reseal it 1 3 Preface gt Notice Laser Safety Europe Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover In the normal operation of the product by user no radiation can leak from the machine This ma
131. Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status or Scheduled Job to check the status lt GB0052_00 2 Check the status 10 10 0089 amp doc0000892010092514 c 1 1 ee Cancel Pause All Close Print Jobs Refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 8 3 Send Job Status screen on page 8 4 Store Job N Status screen on page 8 5 and Scheduled Job screen on page 8 6 GB0182_00 Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Details of the Status Screens Print Job Status Screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0089 FE doc0000892010092514 GB0182_00 Cancel m Pause All Close Print Jobs Item Key Detail Icons that indicate the job type Copy job a Printer job Job from Document Box A FAX reception ma E mail reception Report List ji Data from removable memory Application Cancel Select the job to be canceled from the list and press this key Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information Pause All Print Jobs Pauses all the printing jobs By pressing this key again the printing jobs will be resumed Status of job Printing Printing priority override H Print Waiting Print Waiting priority override Pausing print job or error Canceling the job E The status before starting to print E The status before starting to print priority override mr Printing has been suspe
132. K KK Account Name Others Cancel Save 3 3 e Cancel Next gt afle i 0 Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes GB0441_00 Account Name Searches by account name System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 5 ita ri ane Q User Name User A 2 iit Others Login User Name User A Login Password OOK 1 Account Name Others Cancel Cancel GB0441_00 GB0603_00 Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results Displays details for individual account names E mail Address 10 10 2 Input 11 a i Limit128 E mail Address N a aa a GB0441_01 GB0057_30 My Panel 10 10 E mail Address Access Level dcraintetrater Language English Default Screen Shortcut Shared Shortcut Local Authorization GB0441_01 GB0749_00 J For details on My Panel refer to My Panel on page 9 41 9 43 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Local Authorization 10 10 10 10 E mail Address Access Level Administrator Printer Printer Full Color Off My Panel Local Authorization Cancel Copy Full Color Off Cancel GB0441_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Local Authorization is displayed when selecting On for Local User Authorization Refer to Local User Authorization on page 9 40 3 Register the user System Menu C
133. LAW s amp AS DE 2 4 R y AN b ra 1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle 2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled 3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers 4 Finally align the papers on a level flat table If the paper is curled or folded straighten it before loading Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam Q IMPORTANT If you copy onto used paper paper already used for copying do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality NOTE If printouts are curled turn the stack in the cassette upside down If you use special paper such as letterhead paper with holes or paper with pre prints like logo or company name refer to Paper on page 11 10 Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 3 2 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standard cassette will each hold plain paper recycled paper or color paper The standard cassette holds up to 250 sheets of plain paper 80 g m7
134. Loading Originals Loading Originals Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals NOTE Before opening the document processor be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open faced originals Align it flush against the va original size indicator plates W with the back left corner as YQ the reference point nal Put the scanning side facedown Open the document processor and place the original A CAUTION Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury Q IMPORTANT Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass When placing books or magazines on the machine do so with the document processor in the open position 3 10 Common Operations gt Loading Originals Loading Originals in the Document Processor The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals Both sides of two sided originals are scanned Originals Supported by the Document Processor Weight 50 to 120 g m duplex 50 to 110 g m Size Maximum A4 to Minimum A5 Maximum Legal to Minimum Statement Capacity Plai
135. NOTE Up to 20 settings can be registered as favorites 1 Configure the function Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies O O Paper A Zoom all Density bag Selection as A4 100 Normal 0 ee a re Mr 5 Duplex s Combine agp Collate gi 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off On GBO0001_01 When registering favorites in program mode configure the copy function send function fax function destination or other setting to register Only on products with the fax function installed 2 Display the screen 10 10 Favorites Application m 6 ja fas ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC Addre ss Entry N i e ke E S E S E g Scan to PC Addre Scan to E mail A Scan to E mail A ss Book ddress Entry ddress Book Add GB0056_00 1 Edit GB0779_00 3 17 Common Operations gt Favorites NOTE Press Application to display the Application screen You can install applications that enable your daily work to be accomplished more efficiently For the applications see Favorites Application on page 9 15 Select the function 10 10 57 a 47 2 w ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC Addre ss Entry 1 1 w Scan to PC Addre Scan to E mail A Scan to E mail A ss Book ddress Entry ddress Book GB0056_00 3 Select the job type 10 10 10 10 fo fo Sj oO Eaa EE gt g Cancel lt Back Next gt
136. Name page 9 7 Login Password page 9 7 Access Level page 9 7 Account Name page 9 7 E mail Address page 9 7 Simple Login page 9 7 My Panel page 9 7 Group Name page 9 7 Group ID page 9 7 XIV Cassette MP Tray Settings page 9 7 Cassette 1 to 3 page Paper Size page 9 7 9 7 Media Type page 9 7 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Size page 9 8 page 9 8 Media Type page 9 8 Common Settings page 9 9 Default Screen page 9 9 Sound page 9 9 Buzzer page 9 9 Volume page 9 9 Key Confirmation page 9 9 Job Finish page 9 9 Ready page 9 9 Warning page 9 9 Key Confirmation USB Keyboard page 9 9 FAX Speaker Volume refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Monitor Volume refer to Fax Operation Guide Original Settings page 9 9 Custom Original Size page 9 9 Default Original Size page 9 9 Paper Settings page 9 Custom Paper Size page 9 70 10 Media Type Settings page 9 70 Default Paper Source page 9 10 Paper Selection page 9 70 Media for Auto Color page 9 70 Media for Auto B amp W page 9 70 Special Paper Action page 9 10 XV Function Defaults page File Format page 9 77 9 11 Original Orientation page 9 77 Collate page 9 17 File Separation page 9 77 Scan Resolution page
137. O THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of th
138. OMING CIN CADDIES 5 crea enttecnnencteeadue R ne Secu asuun senncmeutea E E E E E 2 10 COMIMECTING EAN CADIS stecusinisninnieciinitancdienletind eiae EEEE cused E EE a aE EEE S EENE 2 10 Cormmecting USB Cable srsapinscscsiseneriin n re Om ee a i eer ee ee 2 11 Connecting the Power Cable isisisi iii a a a a E a AEE a NR aia ai 2 11 POWT S ear S E A E E E E ee eee 2 13 POWO O eere a E E TE ceeds ee E E EA E EE E te leaneeore 2 13 POWO OI erene a E ER E are nica E E E A E nents 2 13 S M yO AG a E E E E E E E S 2 15 IOVS PUVA Pruner DVS secsec E E A a 2 15 Seino TWAIN TOT IV OE a csvaccccesiajeercitee netic e areena reei EE oaaae EEEE aE EAER RASE 2 19 CIN VIII GR sie e a a e cee ee eee saaseeet 2 20 FTV OE a ane cera etanercept E acc erating E see ag santa onde creosote ange dais 2 21 Sleep and Auto Sleep iste terecicoeadecaadcetasans cca aesamacsseansutadsusisiate domdeatenaene ad seo sen aduaeencteneadans Seeaueeebeauuesseceaees 2 21 Machine Setup Wizard serenecon niniin Ei E REEE E einen EE EEE EEES 2 22 COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail ccccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseaeeeseeeeessaeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeaess 2 23 SPRANG E A eeo E E E E O E E A 2 24 2 1 Preparation before Use gt Part Names Part Names Machine AS Pe ii Document Processor Operation Panel Inner Tray Paper Stopper Multi Purpose Tray MP Tray Paper Width Guides Support Tray Se
139. OPERATION GUIDE MwA KYOCERA SSS SS KS0CERd Ecosrs i Introduction Thank you for your purchase of FS C2526MFP FS C2626MFP This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary so that you can always use the machine in good condition Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand agi NIULCING Ns i Q kancera CR KYOCE Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine Refer to them as necessary Quick Installation Guide Describes the procedures for installation of the machine frequently used operations routine maintenance and troubleshooting action Safety Guide Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine Be sure to read this guide before using the machine Safety Guide FS C2526MFP Describes the machine installation space cautionary space and other information Be FS C2626MFP sure to read this guide before using the machine DVD Product Library Operation Guide This Guide Describes how to load paper basic copy print and scan operations and troubleshooting
140. P server NOTE To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server Network Authentication must be selected for the authentication method and NTLM or Kerberos must be selected as the server type in Enabling Disabling User Login Administration on page 9 34 Server Name Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address up to 64 characters Port Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389 Name 1 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server up to 32 characters Name 2 E mail Address Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e mail address from the LDAP server up to 128 characters Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds from 5 to 255 seconds If using Active Directory of Windows the server name may be same as the server name entered in the network authentication If using Active Directory of Windows displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1 Name 2 can be left out When you assign displayName in Name 1 and department in Name 2 and if the value of displayName is Mike Smith and the value of department is Sales in Active Directory of Windows the user name appears as Mike Smith Sales If using Active Directory of Windows mail of Attribute may be used as E mail Address kk 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 33 display the screen System Menu Counter
141. P server Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder Up to 128 characters For example User ScanData Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64 characters Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64 characters Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 4 Confirm the information Check the information Change the information as needed by pressing the item in question Ready to send 10 10 Host Name Use V or AN to scroll up and down Login User Name Cancel GB0128_00 When specifying a computer or server port number as the destination press Port and enter the port number You can enter a number from 1 to 65 535 with a maximum of 5 digits Confirm the connection status 10 10 UE 10 10 Host Name abc Connection Test Path abc Next Destination 2 Port 139 gt Add to Address Book Login User Name abc Menu Cancel Close GB0128_00 GB0020_00 Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry To enter multiple destinations press Next Destination and enter the next destination You can specify a combined total of up to 5 FTP and SMB destination folders You can register the entered information in the Address Book by pressing Menu and then Add to Address Book 6 2
142. Preparing Necessary Cables cccccccsscccsecceeeceeeceeeceueecaeeceueceueesaeesseesenesueeseeesagees 2 9 CORMCCIING Cables sree decctnciccacaruscsansdactestudduseodamansiiotiwatieasnie EAD aAa DEAA ASE 2 10 Connecting LAN Cable assercion e a EEr i EAA aa AEE EERE 2 10 CONNMECIING USB CADIE xescc cpcscatntccantobenssnocesanaadedinantinvacinndieatheuanennhtesabaateebnedseameteactiee 2 11 Connecting the Power Cable cccccscccssccescceseecueceucecacecseeceusceeecueecseesauessensaaes 2 11 FOO OI seee soccer satires E EEE E EE EER A 2 13 PONT OM sss tensa O ge pede E pees oad sone sere sass ee aaeeetoecia penaeeeeaa 2 13 OVID encase cere cesar esse tastes gore EE AR ace A AEE E ut mean econo E 2 13 PTV CAIN FNC OVA a TEE Gnu tans eeewe ao 2 15 Installing Printer Driver cccccccccecccseecesecceeeceeeceecaueecseeceesaeeeeeeecaeeseeessueeaueesaeess 2 15 Setting TWAIN EI OP settee Soccer vite anccaies ancideicaee ais saneuss capseetsanwnaesucase daceace dan RE EAE 2 19 Seting WIA DIVEN seit gereernatic ergerrasteices opine aeerteaehenee EERE RAA E EAEE EE EARNE 2 20 Energy Saver UNCION sassen aeaieo ose ue aie dente E ade nab ase aan aes EA E EEO R 2 21 Sleep and Auto Sleep 0 cecccecccsscceecceseecneecuceceeeceueceueceueecaeesaeeceueesueesueesaeessensaass 2 21 Machine Setup Wizard x scene ccewsercucaiaddieanios oncdeesigea sjatiseitads E i Ri eaan a Ea 2 22 COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail 2 0 0 0 ccccccccseeeecee
143. Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of pages available Set when Adding an Account see page 9 62 or Editing and Deleting Accounts see page 9 64 The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether Individual or Total is selected for Copier Printer Count on page 9 77 Restriction Items Individual selected for Copier Printer Count Copy Total Limits the total number of pages used for full color and black and white copying Copy Full Color Limits the number of pages used for full color copying Printer Total Limits the total number of pages used for color and black and white printing Printer Full Color Limits the number of pages used for color printing Scan Others Limits the number of pages scanned excludes copying FAX Transmission Limits the number of pages sent by fax FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Total selected for Copier Printer Count Print Total Limits the total number of pages used for copying and printing Print Full Color Limits the number of pages used for full color printing Scan Others Limits the number of pages scanned excludes copying FAX Transmission Limits the number of pages sent by fax FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Applying Restriction
144. S A and or other countries e AppleTalk Bonjour Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries e All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc e Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH e ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation e UFST MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc are installed in this machine e This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co Ltd e This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group e ThinPrint is a trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide GPL LGPL This product contains GPL http www gnu org licenses gpl html and or LGPL http www gnu org licenses IgpI html software as part of its firmware You can get the source code and you are permitted to copy redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL LGPL For further information including availability of the source code visit http www kyoceramita com gpl Open SSL License Copyright c 1998 2006 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms w
145. S g af s S 0 0 System Menu Counter 10 10 Input 3 Limit 64 Login User Name Keyboard abc Login Password Keyboard l GB0704_01 System Menu Counter Login User Name Login Password KK aay A j GB0704_02 Enter the Login User Name and Login Password 3 Enter the login user name to use with simple login Input U 1 Limit32 GB0057_32 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Name System Menu Counter 10 10 j SU Input 6 Limit 32 User User A Password Login off Icon Male 1 l a GB0645_00 GB0057_62 9 47 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration 4 User System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Local User Password Login 2 i o fo o O Sj Si d E a E L fo Select the user to use for simple logins from Local User or Network User Password Login System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 off User User af On n 1 1 Password Login Off 2 Icon Male 1 i o Q e O 4 E d E Icon System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 ras 2 are 2 i oes 7 F 1 2 Password Login off 1 lag Mmm P eno we me e ay S ji S Cancel lt Back ave Cancel A S 5 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Register the user 10 10 Password Login Off Male 1 Cancel GB06
146. Select which registered users can use simple login Password Login Set whether to require entry of a login password at login Icon Select the icon to display on the Simple Login screen 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 33 display the screen 9 45 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration 2 System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Simple Login Local Authentication On Local User List 1 Simple Login Setup 1 1 lt a 1 1 Simple login settings gt GBO710_01 A System Menu Counter ii 3 03 None 04 None Local User Authorization Off GB0435_00 05 None 1 3 Vv n Menu aa Select a key with no registered user and press 2 Enter the user information 1 Select the type of user 10 10 Local User Network User gt C Next gt g 2 Selecta user Local user System Menu Counter 10 10 c Q Searches by user name amp DeviceAdmin 2600 em g User A 1111 ew gt a b User B 2222 ew gt F a User C 3333 Cancel GB0726_00 Allows you to search for a Displays details for individual users user and sorts results 9 46 GB0712_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Network user 10 10 Input Limit 64 Login User Name Keyboard Login Password Keyboard Q y Sj mM Cancel lt Back Next gt
147. XPONERSE AL RAYO 2181 CLASS 3B S7 Al allola HAS owe VORSICHT KLASSE 3B UNSICHTBARE VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN xy SAHAS LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG 3B N KYM TT M LLE LASERS TEILYLLE gt K de NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN CET E h BRAIEO MANIU EEL 4 Maintenance For safety of the service personnel follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual 5 Safety switch The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened Preface gt Notice Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power Caution The power plug is the main isolation device Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source Attention Le d branchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l appareil hors tension Les interrupteurs sur l appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement ils ne mettent pas l appareil hors tension WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 and Part 18 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications
148. a E E T E E E E E E E EE E E E E N E ents 3 29 aE COIN E E E E E A A E T EAT E E N ETE E E E E E 3 31 GCM ecInNg JODS meae r E E E E E E O 3 32 Usno varous TCA Sree sonarai are eter os GREE E ESE EEE A EEE ENO EAEN EE a EE A N 3 33 DVINA O sne a E E E E E E A rewire 3 35 ONNA ORICON sses isanen n ren a E a E e ENE EEE a EEN Ter E E Eis ENEE 3 36 DUDIN aeea E E E E EE E E a veaace aoneseue 3 37 COMINUS SAIN ap EE SE EEEE AE EE E E AET E E E 3 39 FAI O IOCU rriren E E EE E E EE E E 3 41 OWS E E E EA TE I E E ET O A E E ES A A E T E E E E E ceecenadee 3 42 D e E E EE E E A 3 43 SCAN RES 6 0 9 Renee eee eee eee ne EE EEE E E A E 3 44 NONALIMNA E se E E E E 3 45 SADOS S aaea E E E EEEE E A AE EE E EE E ETS 3 46 Background Densi AJUST sriain enpe e a a nE e a a iT aapea era AEn aaeeea 3 47 Z O ae ee where E ce E N R E E E E E N E E S 3 48 PEF ONNO oera a E E E E 3 49 COOL SEEC IOI erdarei onien eine ES EEA Eaa e a T wana tomes hen es aE a ET EEE 3 51 JOD EI ANOU E sosie E EE E EEE E 3 52 PENAS ENN aer E E E EEEE AEE OE 3 54 POTE O E E EEN EE E AE EEEE 3 55 3 1 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray A paper feeder is also available as an option refer to Optional Equipment on page 11 2 Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps 1 3 IN A N C
149. achine may cause jams or may be wrinkled Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine Refer to the subsequent sections for further details Criteria Specifications Weight Cassettes 60 to 163 g m Multi purpose tray 60 to 220 g m Thickness 0 086 to 0 230 mm Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 Moisture content 4 to 6 Grain direction Long grain paper supply direction Pulp content 80 or more NOTE Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below such as moisture or pulp content For this reason we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled dirty or torn Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper
150. age Activation error Checkpoints Corrective Actions Failed to activate the application Contact administrator Reference Page Expansion Authentication is disabled Turn the main power switch off and on If the error exists contact administrator Add the following paper in cassette Does the selected paper size matchs the paper size loaded in the specified paper source Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Is the indicated cassette out of paper Load paper Press Paper Selection to select the other paper source Press Continue to print on the paper in the currently selected paper source Add the following paper in the multi purpose tray Error Message Box limit exceeded Does the selected paper size matches the paper size loaded in the specified paper source Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Is the paper of the selected size loaded in the multi purpose tray Checkpoints Load paper Press Paper Selection to select the other paper source Press Continue to print on the paper in the currently selected paper source Corrective Actions Document box is full and no further storage is available Job is canceled Press End Try to perform the job again after printing or deleting data from the Document box When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes autom
151. and 3 8 14 9 setup Registration and User Management This chapter explains the following topics VSS UNDE ctr ts eucnsocesece eee A EAE E E satin ch cea ae aan E E adyins dade acide E E A 9 2 Jparauon MEIRO eemeemenet ae nee test eat neater eter ey ete eek er yee a eee rere eee ee eee 9 2 System 2 8 Ue 2 1 99 ogee eei eA aE E ee eee eee 9 3 ROPOT eee ae eee EE EE eee 9 5 FSU PONOT cect ne nce tee pa cp eg ccm cic deci ts carmel cps mye sieesedowndce 9 7 Cassette MP Tray Settings cccccccccccssccecseeecceeeeceeeeceeusccceaeeecsaseccsagecceseeeeseueeesseeesseusesssueeeessaeeessagees 9 7 COMTOR UNS ea E E E E E a E 9 9 GOD a E E E E E E asansqsueeseaees 9 14 BU E EE E A EE E EE E A ET vette E E T E EA E A A E oe 9 14 Fav rteS A Ppli atOm sisissaoea dante dec a cutee nate de ede este etee ee aceiedaneneseecass 9 15 PSTN E ice E avert arc cepted nna ventana panne ect E E SEA ES adhe once pepe neta nti EE 9 15 PAO pt eee tanto cece cattene tanta sanne A E A E E E A N 9 16 V e ar ice E E E E EA E A E 9 18 Dat TO eee ere eer ne E E E E EA 9 23 Adjustment Maintenance cas fiscrssinreaarsions Si ainuigernntedieatpesinid vane cits bsraileineiniseshaad ied tpaoneutindaieeiinscue Gbctebebi duane madi nacindacunissns 9 24 Color Registration Procedure cccsenitsavnsscianciansnciaendunnntsaat Senay caaecouaastvcaVernrncaaaradesediadesanentivdatnesasdvacedacseddexs 9 26 User Login AdMINISTA ON cere aicicesatanscionecini ximanindin
152. and 50 NOTE If you enter a value of 0 zero you cannot use the Proof and Hold function 5 8 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Printing and Deleting the Document You can print and delete documents stored in the Proof and Hold box 1 Display the screen Document Box 1 Sub Address Box GB0051_00 2 Select the creator of the document 10 10 E 1 1 Cancel lt Back y G E 3 Select the document 10 10 VI doc 100831170850 _ doc 100831170814 ast e e __ doc 100831170659 __ doc 100831170519 GB0654_00 Cancel 4 Print and delete the document To print the document 10 10 VM Ei doc 100831170850 ce _ Sjdoc 100831170814 _ 1 1 _ Sjdoc 100831170659 __ Sjdoc 100831170519 GB0654_00 Specify the number of copies to print as desired When using the number of copies specified with print job select fos Document Box Removable Removable Memory J 10 10 Private Print Proof and Hold e GB0650_00 Displays details for individual documents E 00 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer To delete Document Box Vi FB doc 100831170850 __ Sjdoc 100831170814 uw i gt __ Sjdoc 100831170659 om __ S doc 100831170519 om el Select the document you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon GB0654_00 Printin
153. and Salet MIOrmMaAUON sssrinin ann annia aiaa EA EEE N Da Ane E OEE EEr arrei 1 9 Her MIN OVA OGD EE E EA E E T teers E E A E E A A E E 1 9 Energy Saving COMMON FUNCUOMN secsauccienssmassacsanandecouanecedeseaiuebaciesabenvouss sanunudeseamoe unc Tean oa rani 1 12 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function ccccccccccccecccsecceseeceeeceeceeeesaeeseeesueceueeseeeseueseueesueeseeesaeeseueesseesaees 1 12 AST RECON erea ae E E E E e AE 1 12 Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program seiciissenssecesapseniieseess saunas fenesdyeusenvexededutaneuinbewewnerdevindeuerstvuseeneusteast 1 12 ADOUL MIS DOT AUN GUJE sissano e ee ia a E ae e AEE Ea OENE OENE eTA TEN 1 13 Conventions in This GUIDE ccc ceecccececeeeceeeeceeecaeeceeeccaeecaeecseeesaeesaueeeaeecueesaeesaueeaeeseeesaneeaseessensseeesagess 1 13 nginals and Paper SBS acra ena ae EE E E E a E TETE EEE EENE 1 15 1 1 Preface gt Notice Notice Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine The symbols and their meanings are indicated below WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient A attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from A insufficient attention to or in
154. ao 2 sided gt gt 2 sided aa Left Right y Top GB0010_01 GB0181_00 t Copying gt Copying Functions 4 Select the binding edge of the finished copies Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Duplex 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Binding in Original 1 Left Right Uriginal Orientation Top Edge on Left 5 Select the original orientation Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Duplex 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Binding in Original Left Right Binding in Finishing Left Right Original Orientation Top Edge on Left Cancel 4 9 GB0010_01 GBO0010_01 oe Left Right Y Top Ready to copy Full Color Top Edge on Top Ea Top Edge on Left Cancel 10 4 10 10 E GB0015_03 GB0012_00 Copying gt Copying Functions Combine Combine 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 copied page You can select the page layout or the type of boundary lines around the pages 2 in 1 Copies 2 originals onto each page 4 in 1 Copies 4 originals onto each page Other Combine 2 in 1 L to R T to B Copies 2 originals onto each page Settings 2 in 1 R to L B to T 4 in 1 Right then Down Copies 4 originals onto each page 4 in 1 Left then Down Border Line Sets the boundary line type to a solid line dotted line or positioning mark Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction
155. applications and image acquisition devices Network USB BO Preparation before Use gt Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Preparing Necessary Cables Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable Connect a LAN cable to the Printer LAN 10Base T 100Base TX or machine Scanner Send E mail Send SMB Send FTP 1000BASE T Shielded Scanner TWAIN WIA Connect a USB cable to the Printer USB2 0 compatible cable Hi Speed machine Scanner WIA USB compliant Max 5 0 m Shielded Preparation before Use gt Connecting Cables Connecting Cables Connecting LAN Cable The equipment can be connected with a network cable and used as a network printer or network scanner 4 Power Off MAY N RAK O Z Fel Q Check that the indicators are off 2 Connect the machine 1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface located on right side of the body 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub 3 Set up the machine Configure the network settings For details refer to Machine Setup Wizard on page 2 22 N 2 10 Preparation before Use gt Connecting Cables Connecting USB Cable The equipment can be connected with a USB cable and used as a printer or scanner in an environment where there is no network 1 Power Off Wun RAM O Z e 9 Check that the indicators are off
156. are shared with other users GB0766_02 GB0305_00 it Destination Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Eas 10 10 Permission Private Address Book Ext Address Book F 1 2 Functions One Touch Key Address Entry E mail Cancel lt GB0771_00 Function Type Wizard a When the job type is Send or FAX selects the Destination Recall Method GB0766_02 Functions Select the item that you want to change 10 10 En 10 10 Destination Address Book V File Format PDF v Original Size A45 Functions 2 m Original Orientation Top Edge on Left Function Type Wizard l e Leal Duplex 1 sided Ca ncaa 014 amp GB0766_02 GB0773_00 Common Operations gt Favorites 6 Function Type Wizard If you selected wizard mode check the function and make changes as necessary Function Type Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Destination Address Book Functions 2 Cancel lt Back Save GB0766_02 i Ww rev O Q 7N 1 GB0775_00 Register the favorite Select the item that you want to change Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending Number Auto GB0766_00 Cancel 3 20 Common Operations gt Favorites Editing and Deleting Favorites This section describes how to edit name and permission of the registered favorite
157. at www kyoceramita com us This warranty does not cover MFP s or accessories which a have become damaged due to operator negligence misuse accidents improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress b have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies c have been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer or d have had the serial number modified altered or removed This warranty does not cover Maintenance Kits or the components of Maintenance Kits which consist of the drum unit the developing unit the transfer belt and the fixing unit which have a separate warranty This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights The Customer may also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to province Neither the seller nor any other person is authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE MFP KYOCERA MITA AMERICA INC KYOCERA MITA CANADA LTD 225 Sand Road 6120 Kestrel Road Fairfield New Jersey Mis
158. atically after a set amount of time elapses 10 13 Reference Page Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages C Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Cannot connect to Authentication Set machine time to match the server s Server time Check the domain name Check the host name Check the connection status with the server Cannot duplex print on the Did you select a paper size type Press Paper Selection to select the following paper that cannot be duplex printed available paper Press Continue to print without using Duplex function Cannot print the specified Only one copy is available due to number of copies processing too many jobs in parallel Press Continue to continue printing Press Cancel to cancel the job Cannot process this job This job is canceled because it is restricted by User Authorization or Job Accounting Press End Cassette is not installed Cannot feed paper Set the cassette indicated on the touch panel Check the toner container The toner container is not installed correctly Set it correctly Check waste toner box Is the waste toner box full Replace the waste toner box The waste toner box is not installed correctly Set it correctly When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a se
159. b Accounting GB0461_02 To count the number of pages for all account select Total Job Accounting To count the number of pages by account select Each Job Accounting Searches by account name System Menu Counter 10 10 Q iit Sales department 00000001 Gn Others GB0469_00 G Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results To count the number of pages by account name press for the account name whose usage you wish to view 9 68 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 2 View the number of pages System Menu Counter 10 10 Printed Pages Scanned Pages FAX TX Pages o FAX TX Time Factetine ooo00 00 00 Counter m Reset GB0463_00 To reset the counter 10 10 ae Printed Pages Scanned Pages 1 1 FAX TX Pages o Counter Reset GB0463_00 9 69 System Menu Counter 10 10 Copy B amp W wew fi Z Copy Full Color copy rutcomy faz Copy Total 333 Printer B amp W 111 GB0464_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered Copier Printer Count Format When Total is selected for Copier Print Total Total numbe
160. be selected as the authentication destination o N N gt aa 0 Simple Login Select the user to login 10 10 lt GB0023_00 If this screen is displayed during operations select a user and log in NOTE If a user password is required an input screen will be displayed Refer to Simple Login on page 9 45 Logout To logout from the machine press the Logout key to return to the login user name password entry screen Logout Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances e When the machine is put to Sleep by pressing the Power key e When the Auto Sleep function is activated e When the auto panel reset function is activated 3 16 Common Operations gt Favorites Favorites Frequently used functions can be registered as favorites so that they can be called up easily The following functions are pre registered on this machine You can delete these functions as well as register new functions e ID Card Copy e Paper Saving Copy e Scan to PC Address Entry e Scan to PC Address Book e Scan to E mail Address Entry e Scan to E mail Address Book Registering Favorites When registering a favorite you can choose from two methods for calling it up e Wizard mode Registered settings are called up in order and configured as you check or change each one e Program mode Settings are called up immediately when you press the key to which they are registered
161. be set while printing from USB memory 10 10 Copies 1 r Duplex Paper Selection A4 BD P7233 Collate _ 4 On 4 sided GB0001_01 GB0097_00 Print Screen Cancel This function can be set while sending a document Ready to send 10 10 Dest pCa d Recall One Touch One Touch Key j Address Book Book Ext Address Book Address Book se E Email Folder s Functions Send Screen 1 2 lv vv Favorites 0 This function can be set while saving a file to USB memory Ready to store in Box Resolution 300x300dpi a Ia aaaaaaaaaaaaasasasssassussssssssssssi i i iIiIi5seoi a So ey Density Le File Name sania ab Entry Normal 0 doc Store File Screen Cancel GB0055_00 GB0096_00 In this guide steps where touch panel keys are used are outlined in red E g Select Zoom Ready to copy Full Color Paper Selection 10 10 Copies ll Density X Favorites GB0001_01 Procedures consisting of a series of operation panel and or touch panel operations are numbered as follows E g Select Functions and then EcoPrint Ready to copy Full Color M Paper Selection A40 Mp 173 Duplex cast 1 sided er 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies l e 2 gt EcoPrint S Zoom il Density o off AN Le Jt vey Hue Adjustment 100 Normal 0
162. ber 3 13 Sharpness 3 46 Shortcuts Editing and Deleting 3 27 Registering 3 25 Using 3 28 Simple Login 3 16 Sleep 2 21 Slit Glass 2 5 SMB Client Transmission Protocol Detail 9 20 SMTP 11 25 SMTP E mail TX Protocol Detail 9 20 SNMP Protocol Detail 9 20 SNMP v3 Protocol Detail 9 20 Solving Malfunctions 10 8 sound 9 9 Specifications Document Processor 11 20 Environmental Specifications 11 21 Machine 11 18 Printer 11 19 Scanner 11 20 Status Job Cancel 8 1 Status Page 11 25 Storing Size 7 13 Subnet Mask 11 25 Setup 9 18 Symbols 1 2 System Menu 9 2 T TCP IP 11 25 TCP IP IPv4 Setup 9 18 TCP IP IPv6 11 25 Setup 9 19 TEL connector 2 4 Thick Paper 11 16 ThinPrint Protocol Detail 9 20 ThinPrintOverSSL Protocol Detail 9 20 Index 4 Toner Container 2 3 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 8 14 Replacement 10 2 Top Cover 2 3 Top Cover Lever 2 5 Touch Panel 2 7 Transparencies 11 14 TWAIN 11 25 Setting TWAIN Driver 2 19 U Unknown Login User Name Job 9 72 USB 11 25 USB Cable Connecting 2 11 USB Interface 2 9 USB Interface Connector 2 4 USB Keyboard Type 9 13 USB Memory Printing Documents 7 2 Removing 7 7 Saving Documents 7 5 USB Memory Slot 2 2 User Login Administration 9 32 Adding a User 9 36 Editing and Deleting 9 42 Enabling Disabling 9 34 Group Authorization 9 51 Local User Authorization 9 40 My Panel 9 41 Obtain Network User Property 9 55 Simple Login 9 45 User Pr
163. ccc ccccccccceccceeeceeeceeeeseeeseueceeeseeeeseeeseeeseneeseeeseeeee 3 21 Using AV ONC Se sesseur pienen E aE A E E EEEE EEE TEO 3 23 SPORCU cer ee A A E E A E E E E 3 25 Registering SNOrtCU S cccscesiceetsetereadicsssenSorcdaasoe2netdinsiswenddevunidasseinidadtsdiaseetsesdaesarsedeadecs 3 25 Editing and Deleting Shortcuts cc cecccecccscecececeneceececeeeceeceeeeeueeseeeseeesaueesaeesnees 3 27 JSN SNONCUIS ede eee aceca cto ceesen ce Genseascieuessnasaeudoostene cuestosteusecsese see sececenseeneretaatueerenice 3 28 Quick Setup WIZA A araia AE AA runners ss 3 29 HOD S TOO rana E E E N ees dastes eaecea ee 3 31 ANC SINC JODS Sarro E EEE E EAE E E A 3 32 Using Various FUNCHONS sssasissseriiseninissinn iia EEE EEEa E AAR Ea RAES 3 33 Common F nctionally siririna aaa EAEE aD Ga 3 34 ana ZS eraa E a EEE E EEE 3 35 OngNAFONENtAtION sxsiesirsnraninia a a a As EEEa 3 36 DUIO oiea EOE se E sees TE E E T A E E E TE 3 37 Continuous SCAN sasien SEE E ES 3 39 Papar Selec ennaa Ear a aeea 3 41 GOG aire E E E E E T E eee seca 3 42 DONY enera EEE EE E E EEEE AE A E E AE EE 3 43 Scan Resol llon accuncedegecue seg tse nacaruncuseseeeooruese ae SAE Ei Era agai 3 44 NaN E ecra EA A EE E E 3 45 AOE S eee EEE E AE 3 46 Background Density Adjust ccccccccccecceeeceeeeeeece cece esse eeseeeeseeeseeeseeesseeesueeseeseeees 3 47 OO si cease e ost uduecs set inamssadeiaranadeantsuan E E Eilat 3 48 PO FONTA aie sa eee AA E A EE EEEE OEA 3 49
164. ccccecccsecesececeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeesseeeseeeaaes 1 8 Legal and Safety Information cccccccsscccseeceeecceecceeeceeceeeeaeesueesaeeeeaeeseeesaeeseeeesenssaeesaess 1 9 Legal I IONMIAMION sainn iae AAEE E AEEA ARE AEAEE 1 9 Energy Saving Control Function cccccccsecceececeeeceeecceeecueecaeeeeeeeseeesseeesesaueesaeens 1 12 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function ccccecccceccceecceeeeseeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeeeeeeaeeeees 1 12 Papar ROCI O eein E E E E peace es 1 12 Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program ccccccccceececeeeeeeeceeaeeeseeeeseueeeeeeesaeeetaes 1 12 About this Operat n GUIDE is pi saceoncnseseviesinmoresavieennenmaeveckiescerudnsesentaeseweteacueoseaumeesn eteneeaws 1 13 Conventions in This Guide 200 ccc ee cc eccc cece cece eeeeeeeaeeeaeeeseeeseueseeeseeeseeesaeesaeesaeeeaes 1 13 Originals and Paper Sizes aiices saceincasennedvercien seuss sundisanncieaden votdanisdh dowecdaiceniseedeeeds ocssexbeandes 1 15 2 Preparation before Use ccccccccseceeceeeceeeeeeesseeseesesensneeesenseneeaeeeeeneneess 2 1 FA INGUNCS iren E seins pase E ioe ate dees A E ee 2 2 PONENT VINO DP EE E E PI oer A SEAS AE T SA A A aden sanoneeesee 2 2 OT AION F anok eperera E te dee EE E O E E S 2 6 TOUR IP AMON sirpin E tease RA E E EATE E AEAEE 2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables c ccccccccsseeceeeseeeeeeeaeeeaes 2 8 OTIS CONN ANA 2c gta hoc aiaa AEA RAA a aeia 2 8
165. cd encusawaewamennaundd sumedauteaaieawsiecdsususdustivadhndelanentnens 9 64 Restricting the Use of the Machine cccccescccescccnccceececenceceuceneueeseesensueeneesensusenseseteueenseseteneeseseess 9 66 Counting the Number of Pages Printed ccccecccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeseeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeaeeeaueeeseeeegeseeeses 9 68 Prining AM ACCOUMUNG REDON 6 sete xtcates cc ceacesaececscatecccesecddauessbassitnanendan ces menedandevanunwandevaxeasatecimieiventiaiatnewser 9 70 JOD Accounting Default Setting sencsnntencenvincsscoscennsscciextenadaiencndiddnousedenssadcateimeatnenwcdedatendiaeed bausaieoancscaeMaencsiens 9 71 Unknown Login User Name Job cccccccccsecccsescceeeeceeeeceaeecsaueesausenaeesaseesausesauecsaeeesseeeneesensesensseessaess 9 72 9 1 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Menu Configure settings related to overall machine operation Operation Method The system menu is operated as follows 1 Display the screen lt gt System Menu Counter 2 Configure the function 10 10 Ep system YN 4 Date Timer Displays available functions 5 5 f Adjustment Maintenance GB0054_04 System Menu Counter 10 10 Date Time 10 10 2010 10 10 Date Format DD MM YYYY 1 3 Time Zone 09 D0 Osaka Sapporo Tokyo Vv Displays available GB0610_00 functions tot Selecting a value it to be 12 00 Internatio
166. ce the paper with new paper 3 2 Are there any loose scraps or jammed Remove any jammed paper 10 22 paper in the machine Printouts are wrinkled or Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 curled Documents are printed Are the application software settings at Check that the printer driver and improperly the PC set properly application software settings are set properly Cannot print with USB Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host 9 22 memory USB memory not recognized settings 10 8 Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Printouts are too light Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper 3 2 Have you changed the density Select appropriate density level 3 43 9 24 Is the toner distributed evenly within Shake the toner container from side to 10 2 the toner container side several times Is there a message indicating the Replace the toner container 10 2 addition of toner Is EcoPrint mode enabled Disable EcoPrint mode 4 13 Make sure the media type setting is 9 7 correct the paper being used Printouts are too dark Have you changed the density Select appropriate density level 3 43 9 24 Run Calibration 9 25 The background density is Carry out Background Density 3 47 obtrus
167. ceceucecsececsuceseaeeseeeseeessueeeceessaeeesesesseesseeeseeeeseessseeesneeees 10 13 Ceding Papar JanS aeee E E E E E O 10 22 PoPaa LOC AON serana EEE E E EEE E E E E EEE 10 22 IEE APU OS MAy eE E E E E E E 10 23 Be SS EE A E A N OE A E EE OE A ne E E E PAE ETETE T 10 23 Papar co 216 lt nen et ee E E EE ne E E E ERA 10 24 inside the IAG INC sssssstnransinesani ieia A E A daa Ea aa Aaa EaR DEEA NERE aiai 10 24 D CUME PrO COS ON aripa E E E EEE E AE E 10 26 10 1 Troubleshooting gt Toner Container Replacement Toner Container Replacement When the touch panel displays Toner is empty replace the toner A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns Installation procedures of the toner container is same for every color The procedures here represent the cyan toner container 1 Remove the old toner container A UDES OS Q IMPORTANT To prevent toppling the top cover and document processor cannot be opened at the same time Open the top cover to the position shown If the tray is not opened to this position it will not be possible to install the toner container 10 2 Troubleshooting gt Toner Container Replacement 3 Install the new toner container Q IMPORTANT When closing the top cover be careful not to pin
168. ceeccceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeees 6 23 Registering Destinations in the Address BOOK ccccccccceccceeeceeeceeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeseeeseeesaeeeaees 6 24 PROGINS OPAC sorrendi nni enin en EE EE E EE EEEE E E E AT OAE E ESEN 6 24 Adna AOUD eae E E E E E E eee ers 6 28 Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries cccccccccccceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseueeseeseeeaeeseeeseeeseeseeeaeeenees 6 31 Adding a Destination on One Touch Key ccccccceccesecceeeceeecececeueceuecsaeececsaeecauecaueecaeesauecsuesagecsusesseesuessuesegs 6 33 PROGINS SI AU OU sanies a TEE Ei a T ae aN a AES AEA E OT EERE 6 33 Editing and Deleting One Touch Key s siiscosdessicaccnceeudieccadincabasasasmeldansensabacecetentatacasudeuiwieteewenosnedens eaaa 6 35 SSPN FUNUN eean eee EEE E EAE EE EEE ee ee E ES 6 36 SNN AG aer E EE E N E EEE A E EE 6 37 g Ae Eea E E EE O N E E EA A E A A E E E 6 39 Eana UDe BOO ooren E E E E i a 6 40 BU EGO TA aree i EE NE EE TENE warned EE E EE EES 6 41 WV SCAM a E E E A E EE E E E 6 42 Scanning USING TVALI sesscsienrsinan eina DEEE EE N Eaa DETA NN EE TEE EEk eaaa aa aea i E ES 6 45 6 1 sending gt Basic Operation Basic Operation This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E mail message or to a PC linked to the network In order to do this it is necessary to register the sender and destination recipient address on the network A network environment which e
169. ch your fingers 10 3 lt O E Troubleshooting gt Waste Toner Box Replacement Waste Toner Box Replacement When the touch panel displays Check waste toner box replace the waste toner box 1 Remove the old waste toner box Q IMPORTANT Remove the waste toner box as gently as possible so as not to scatter the toner inside Do not let the opening of the waste toner box face downward 2 Install the new waste toner box 1 10 4 Troubleshooting gt Waste Toner Box Replacement After replacing the toner containers and the waste toner box clean the paper transfer unit For instructions refer to Cleaning on page 10 6 10 5 Troubleshooting gt Cleaning Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality A CAUTION For safety always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine Glass Platen Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened NOTE Do not use organic solvents or other strong chemicals Document Processor If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth NOTE Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth Do not use water soap or solvents for cleaning 1 Wipe the slit glass 10 6 Troubleshooting gt Cleaning 2 Wipe the white guide Paper Transfer Unit The paper transfer unit should b
170. chine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC EN 60825 1 2007 Caution Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area DANGER CLASS 3B INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENZIONE CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO ATTENTION CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT PRECAUCION CLASSE 3B Pe e a LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABR EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO VORSICHT KLASSE 3B UNSICHTBARE VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN 3B NAKYMATTOMALLE LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN Be ZR ABERDARE FF STARSSAHEH Pet RBH iE mAB AT AtEm HAAT SRW EAX RES 24 CLASS 3B S7H alolyaas AA HA HAL Be CCRH lt EDS AIBROMAL Y tn CET E LEBEARICO MRNIELYG lt EX The label shown below is attached on the rear side of the machine CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT Preface gt Notice SAFETY OF LASER BEAM USA 1 Safety of laser beam This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U S DHHS Department of Health and
171. click the DVD icon 2 Display the screen ane 3 OSX 10 5 or higher aj M im Q DEVICES DEVICES SHARED PLACES PLACES Double click Double click x 6 items Zero KB available o Double click either OS X 10 2 and 10 3 Only OS X 10 4 Only or OS X 10 5 or higher depending on your Mac OS version A x 2 items Zero KB available C 4 3 Install Printer Driver AOC Install Pe biah 1 1 2 Welcome to the Bi i SRAM E AT Installer Introduction Read Me You will be guided through the steps necessary to install this software Destination Select llation Type Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software This completes the printer driver installation Next specify the print settings If an IP or AppleTalk connection is used the settings below are required If a USB connection is used the machine is automatically recognized and connected Preparation before Use gt Installing Software 4 Configure the printer 1 Display the window Ae Print amp Fax A a ShowAll ann System Preferences Q s Printers Personal er Adobe PDF 7 0 e a e BD i Appearance Desktop amp Dock Expos amp Language amp Security Spotlight Screen Saver Spaces Text Sa Options amp Supplies Hardware A JA 9 Location ko y Ged S3 Kind Adobe PDF J 3016 102 CDs amp
172. color mode of the print results Publishing This tab lets you create cover sheets and insert and add OHP film for print jobs Job This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine Regularly used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later Since saved documents can be printed directly from the machine this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that you don t want others to see Advanced This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data It also provides simple color adjustment functionality Profiles Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile Saved profiles can be recalled at any time so it s a convenient practice to save frequently used settings Reset Click to revert settings to their initial values 5 4 Printing gt Printing from Applications Printer Driver Help The printer driver includes Help To learn more about print settings display the printer driver print settings screen and display Help using either of the methods explained below cme i Pa BESE Properties 2 ilzlz O r MEE S mM fi es i m jn grees S Orientation Color Oda Collate Print on both Multiple pages sides per sheet e Click the button in the upper right corner of the screen and then click the item you want to know about TT i
173. content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage Moisture affects how the paper is supplied the electrostatic changeability of the paper and how the toner adheres 11 12 Appendix gt Paper Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room High relative humidity causes paper to become damp making the edges expand so it appears wavy Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6 To maintain the right level of moisture content bear in mind the following considerations e Store paper in a cool well ventilated place e Store paper flat and unopened in the package Once the package is opened reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while e Store paper sealed in the original package and box Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors e Before using paper that has been stored keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours e Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat sunlight or dampness Other Paper Specifications Porosity The density of the paper fibers Stiffness Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine causing jams Curl Most paper na
174. copying on Letterhead Original g i O ll Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray Value Adjust Print Direction Speed Priority Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Media Type Setting The following media type and paper weight combinations are available Light 64 g m or less Heavy 1 106 g m to 135 g m Normal 1 60 g m to 75 g m Heavy 2 136 g m to 163 g m Normal 2 76 g m to 90 g m Heavy 3 164 g m and more Normal 3 91 g m to 105 g m Extra Heavy Transparencies Each media type s default weight is indicated Media Type Plain Default Normal 2 Media Type Color Default Normal 2 Transparency Extra Heavy Prepunched Normal 2 Rough Normal 3 Letterhead Normal 2 Vellum Light Coated Heavy 1 Labels Heavy 1 Thick Heavy 2 Recycled Normal 2 Envelope Heavy 2 Preprinted Normal 2 High Quality Normal 3 Bond Normal 3 Cardstock Heavy 1 Custom 1 8 Normal 2 For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed Custom 1 8 Description Select the setting for duplex Value Prohibit Permit Function Defaults File Format Change names for Custom 1 8 Names should be not more than 16 characters Selecting media type at multi purpose tray the name after change will be
175. correct compliance with the related points Symbols The A symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol A N General warning A Warning of high temperature The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol S Warning of prohibited action Q Disassembly prohibited The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol Q Alert of required action Z Remove the power plug from the outlet Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required NOTE An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function 1 2 Preface gt Notice Environment The service environmental conditions are as follows e Temperature 50 to 90 5 F 10 to 32 5 C e Humidity 15 to 80 However adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality It is recommended to use the machine at a
176. ction of the Multi Purpose Tray Cassette 1 USB Memory Slot 10 Main Power Switch O ON O Ao A WO N 11 Paper Gauge 12 Lower Feed Cover 2 2 Preparation before Use gt Part Names 14 EA 15 EN ee o 16 A NSN Sf j RE AANE 17 i M VETI _ pines 13 Top Cover 14 Black Toner Container K 15 Magenta Toner Container M 16 Cyan Toner Container C 17 Yellow Toner Container Y 18 Waste Toner Cover 19 Waste Toner Box CA Q SSS SOAS J 20 Fuser Cover 21 Paper Transfer Unit 22 Paper Ramp 23 Duplex Unit 2 3 Preparation before Use gt Part Names 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 24 Option Interface Slot 1 25 LINE connector 26 TEL connector 27 Network Interface Connector Indicators 28 USB Interface Connector 29 Option Interface Slot 2 30 Right Cover 31 Power Cord Connector 32 Rear Cover 33 Rear Cover Lever Only on products with the fax function installed 2 4 Preparation before Use gt Part Names 43 42 34 Original Width Guides 35 Document Processor Cover 36 Document Processor Open Close Handle 37 Original Table 38 Original Stopper 39 Original Eject Table 40 Top Cover Lever 41 Handholds 42 Platen 43 Slit Glass To prevent toppling the top cover and document processor cannot be opened at the same time 48 44 Cassette 1 45 Paper Width Guides
177. cut 1 Select the shortcut type and number you wish to edit 10 10 10 10 2 Private Shortcut 1 Private Shortcut 2 F 1 1 Shared Shortcut 1 Shared Shortcut 2 Cancel Next gt el GB0790_01 GB0796_00 2 Edit the shortcut No Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 1 Functions Zoom e GB0794_00 E GB0797_00 t Name Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Input 10 3z Limit 24 _ Number Shortcut 1 Name Shortcut 1 1 1 a O O NR LO Q O a 0 GB0797_00 3 27 Common Operations gt Shortcuts 3 Register the shortcut 10 10 Number Shortcut 1 2 Name Shortcut 1 Functions Zoom Cancel GB0797_00 To delete Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Private Shortcut 1 Private Shortcut 2 Edit 1 1 Shared Shortcut 1 Shared Shortcut 2 GB0790_01 GB0798_00 L e t Select the shortcut you wish to delete Using Shortcuts The registered shortcut will be displayed on the Copy Send FAX Print from USB Memory or Save to USB Memory or Polling Box initial screen Pressing Shortcut will switch to the registered function s screen Only on products with the fax function installed Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Co Copies 1 ke Paper A Zoom FE Density eai Selection i A40 100 Normal 0 _ a fr re Du
178. d interface cable 2 Remove the covers 3 Install the memory module 1 Remove the memory module from its package 11 3 Appendix gt Optional Equipment 2 With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket align the cut out part with the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle Q IMPORTANT Before inserting a memory module in the machine make sure that the machine is switched off 3 Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine 4 Reinstall the covers Removing the Memory Module To remove a memory module remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine Then carefully push out the two socket clamps Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove Verifying the Expanded Memory To verify that the memory module is working properly test it by printing a status page Refer to Report on page 9 5 Card Authentication Kit User login administration can be performed using IC cards To do so it is necessary to register IC card information on the previously registered local user list For more information about how to register this information refer to the C Card Authentication Kit Operation Guide Gigabit Ethernet Board The Gigabit Ethernet Board provides a high speed connection for the Gigabit per second interface Since the kit was designed to work with TCP IP NetWare NetBEUI and AppleTalk protocols in the same way as the main unit it fulfills
179. de Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden 11 21 Appendix gt Glossary Glossary AppleTalk AppleTalk which comes with Apple Computer s Mac OS is a network protocol AppleTalk enables file printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data This is the auto form feed timeout When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically put paper out However no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed Auto IP Auto IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup However DHCP requires a DHCP server Auto IP is a server less method of choosing an IP address IP addresses between 169 254 0 0 to 169 254 255 255 are reserved for Auto IP and assigned automatically Auto Paper Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Auto Sleep A mode designed for electrical power saving activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period In Sleep mode power consumption is kept to a minimum Bonjour Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on a
180. defects in material and workmanship Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions The parties agree that all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability are excluded Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts upon their return to Monotype Imaging In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits lost data or any other incidental or consequential damages or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces Massachusetts U S A law governs this Agreement 10 You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging 11 Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not c
181. dsanssuetiredieecannieseeueceedes 10 26 11 APPEND Qeenenee eer nae eee ee oe eee eee eer tee er ee ee ee eee 11 1 OpTOMal EgUIDMENT osjaccce secede cent aA a E A EE a 11 2 Overview of Optional Equipment nnannnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnernnnrrnrrsnnnnrnrrnnrrnrrsrrsnrnnrsnrnrrnne 11 2 Paper COS eicececede eects seesaw poe aE EaD TEREA EEE Taa AAS 11 2 Expansion Memory schscieateedsdebiccescanatacueicsesdahieca lade tsendsatsodsasis etvuiedtowetacdesendusatedehe lt 11 3 Card AUthenucat on KIL iiss coscxcctvecasecsssunes nen arenaiaagesecanabaencouseceecetredins wentcatiaxteaeee ets 11 4 Gigabit Ethernet Board ccccccccecccsecceeeceeeceueeceecaeeecaeeseeesauecaueeseeeseeesaeecsaeesaeeses 11 4 USB ING YOON 2poxtscee ec aecorecte ee esate sa seccerec neers eeecenceeaeedes A E 11 4 OOM AR HUNG HOM nsec rear A R A A E aca erteuasdedenieeetantex lt 11 5 Character Entry Method cscacsteretcnceaceccoiedadeass tea vosesedenienisadantadeeinesuutbiseeiawecaiccagiaawbageieearncesecds 11 7 EMU COONS Grace cccteenseaeentine E suet oveoesawserndeaseusieebicue pce EE EEEE 11 7 FOG aE sragancoe nse sianiin E crue eerecattsianuedateed E E E E 11 10 Basic Paper Specifications ccccccccsecccecceeeeceeecueeceaeecueccueecueesaeeseeesaeeeseeeseeeseees 11 11 Choosing the Appropriate Paper ccccccceccceeceeeeceeeeseeece cess eeseeeeaeesaeeeseeeseeseeees 11 11 Special Paper iseinean ee er eee eee 11 14 SPEEA eeir rece ec tessoeeese tar
182. e EE E E a EE ter 11 18 PUN NG TMG E E A E EN E T E ee ae A A E 11 18 PARIGI soreaen an iren E r E E E EEE E saat 11 19 C e E EEE E E E A E A 11 20 Document PP IOCCS SON sscict ax conde ere saedetecetees a E E iae 11 20 Environmental Specifications cccccccccsccceccceeceeeceeeecesecueeceeseesseessaeeseeeseeesagees 11 21 E ene EEIE EAE A EEE AEE O E N E 11 22 O E E aeeeesses seeveeessaeczseqeeeveaceseeeaeao Index 1 Vi Qu ick Guide Be sure to read Precautions for Use before using this machine To make copies p ltcopies Simply press the Start key to make copies You can also fine tune the copy settings by changing the 7 paper size adjusting the density etc To print It prints You can print via a network or print a PDF file directly from USB memory ue Printing p rint over What you want Copying with ie ae Print via a the USB to do specific settings Removable USB network connection Memory Install the printer driver on your computer 2 75 Loading Paper 3 2 Loading Originals 3 10 Printing Documents Operation Copying 4 2 Stored in Printing from Applications 5 2 Removable USB Memory 7 2 Vil To send documents Ta It sends You can send scanned images via a network Or you can also store scanned images in USB memory Administrator tasks Saving aoe you want Send as E mail enh poder Documents to USB Memory Connecting Cables Plug the USB memory Network Setup L
183. e cleaned each time the toner container and waste toner box are replaced To maintain optimum print quality it is also recommended that the inside of the machine be cleaned once a month as well as when the toner container is replaced It should also be cleaned if streaking or lines appear on printed copies or if printouts appear faint or blurred A CAUTION Some parts are very hot inside the machine Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury 1 Open the rear cover 7A 2 Clean the paper transfer unit Paper Transfer Unit Transfer Belt Black Registration Roller Metal Transfer Roller Black Duplex Unit Paper Ramp Wipe away the paper dust on the registration roller and the paper ramp using the cloth Q IMPORTANT Be careful not to touch the black transfer roller and black transfer belt during cleaning as this may adversely affect print quality 10 7 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving lf a problem occurs with your machine look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages If the problem persists contact your Service Representative Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page An application does not start Is the Auto Panel Reset time short Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 9 23 30 seconds or more The
184. e library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT IND
185. ecking their status Refer to Status Job Cancel on page 8 1 Canceling printing from a computer To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing do the following 1 Double click the printer icon i11 displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer 2 Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select Cancel from the Document menu 3 32 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Using Various Functions This section describes common functionality that can be configured for copying sending and the document box 1 Display the screen Co py Press the key of each function When using USB memory plug it into the USB memory slot Press Yes on the displayed screen When printing from USB memory select the file to be printed and press Print When storing a document to USB memory select the folder where the file will be stored and press Menu and then Store File O For details refer to Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB N Memory on page 7 2 or Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB on page 7 5 NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Select the functions 1 Select the functions to use Copies Grr jon ae URI vensty Press Functions to display all the functions Selection S f AAD 100 Normal 0 R
186. ect from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio Il Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 or Custom NOTE Paper Size is only displayed when the size dial on the cassette is set to Other For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size refer to Custom Paper Size on page 9 10 Media Type Multi Purpose Tray Paper Size Set the media type to load in optional paper feeders Cassette 2 and 3 Value Plain 105 g m or less Rough Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more Coated High Quality Custom 1 8 NOTE Labels Cardstock Envelope and Coated are shown when the optional paper feeder multi purpose is installed To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 9 10 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 10 for selecting Custom 1 8 Description Set the paper size for multi purpose tray Value Metric Select from A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 or Folio Inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio II Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 or
187. ecurity 9 22 IPSec Setup 9 22 Job Canceling 3 32 Checking History 8 7 Checking Status 8 2 Details of the Status Screens 8 3 Pause and Resumption 8 3 Sending the Log History 8 8 Job Accounting 9 57 Adding an Account 9 62 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9 68 Default Setting 9 71 Editing and Deleting 9 64 Enabling Disabling 9 60 Login 9 61 Logout 9 61 Printing an Accounting Report 9 70 Restricting the Use of the Machine 9 66 Job Box 5 6 Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents 5 11 Private Print 5 6 Proof and Hold 5 8 Job Finish Notice 3 52 JPEG TIFF Print 7 11 K Keyboard Layout 9 13 KPDL 11 23 Index 2 L Label 11 15 Language 9 5 LAN Interface 9 22 LDAP Protocol Detail 9 20 LDAP Security 9 22 Legal Information 1 9 Legal Restriction on Copying 1 8 Legal Restriction on Scanning 1 8 LINE connector 2 4 Login 3 15 9 61 Logout 3 16 9 61 Lower Feed Cover 2 2 LPD Protocol Detail 9 20 M Machine Setup Wizard 2 22 Main Power Switch 2 2 Manual Setting IPv6 9 19 Measurement 9 13 Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 11 Multi Purpose Tray 2 2 11 24 Loading Paper 3 6 Paper Size and Media Type 3 29 9 8 Multi Sending 6 23 N NetBEUI 11 24 Protocol Detail 9 20 NetWare 11 24 Setup 9 21 Network Preparing 2 8 Setup 2 22 9 18 Network Cable Connecting 2 10 Network Indicators 2 4 Network Interface 2 9 Network Interface Connector 2 4 O One Touch Key 6 33 Adding a Destination 6 33 Editing and Deleting
188. ed by the LDAP server Book This setup is available when SSL is On Value Off LDAPv3 TLS LDAP over SSL LDAP Security User Property After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON LDAP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 9 20 LAN Interface Item Description LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used Value Auto 10Base Half 10Base Full 100Base Half 100Base Full 1OOOBASE T After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces Description USB Host This locks and protects the USB memory slot Value Unblock Block USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector Value Unblock Block Optional Interface 1 This locks and protects the optional interface slots Optional Interface 1 FAX Optional Interface 2 Network Value Unblock Block Optional Interface 2 Optional Interface This locks and protects the optional interface slot Value Unblock Block Only on products with the fax function installed Only on products without the fax function 9 22 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu RAM Disk Setting Description RAM Disk Setting A RAM disk can be created and i
189. eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseneeseeeesees 2 23 SCRAN IVAN suiecig Access aetosctate serait ates E de eahieeeeeesaeseosans 2 24 3 Common Operations sssvsscscscsscesenscecsessscpacstannsncsceeneannsscestwandeswenanaussteneaenies 3 1 Kerisi aeiae e EE I EEE EESE EE A T D E E eadevaecaaee 3 2 Before Loading Paper ccccccscccssccesceceeeceueceucecseecueeceueecaeesaeessueesueesaeesaeeeseeesaeesaass 3 2 Loading Paper in the Cassettes ccccccccecccsecceseeeseeceeecececeueceeeesaeesseeseeesaueeseeeseeees 3 3 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray cccccccecccsecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeseesaees 3 6 LO AGING OMG GNS seg ccces coedecsateceee N saaeon cen soebossaceseee E O 3 10 Placing Originals On the Platen ccccccccccccceseeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseueseeeeseeeseeeees 3 10 Loading Originals in the Document Processor ccceccceecceeeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeas 3 11 Checking the Equipment s Serial Number ccccccccceccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeseeesaneeaes 3 13 CTO CIS ME OUI OI ise cites stam sacs siyseee nse an vecenuacete E a E 3 14 EGOIN OO serene E E EAEE eetdctie ae E E E E E 3 15 LO e E A E 3 15 POG arearen ea E E AET ATE EEA A E 3 16 FA OMI aa AE e naltenceneduteceaemeebencitedtatececaue 3 17 Registering Favorites ccceccceccceecceecceeeeeeeceececaeecauecaueesaeecaeecueceueesaeesseesaeessueesaeeses 3 17 Editing and Deleting Favorites
190. efer to Common Functionality on page 3 34 aZ E E a Y S Duplex be Combine agp coate i 4 1 sided gt gt 1 sided 1 Off On GBO0001_01 3 33 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Common Functionality Functionality related to originals What do you want to do Specify the original size Reference Page Original Size gt page 3 35 Specify the original orientation to scan in the correct direction Original Orientation gt page 3 36 Automatically scan 2 sided originals Duplex gt page 3 37 Scan a large number of originals separately and then produce as one job Continuous Scan gt page 3 39 Functionality related to document quality What do you want to do Specify the paper size and type Reference Page Paper Selection gt page 3 41 Collate the output documents in page order Collate gt page 3 42 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 43 Set the resolution at which to scan originals Scan Resolution page 3 44 Select original image type for best results Original Image gt page 3 45 Emphasize the outline of texts or lines Blur the image outline Sharpness P page 3 46 Darken or lighten the background i e the area with no text or images of originals Background Density Adjust gt page 3 47 Enlarge or shrink originals according to the sending or storing size Zoom page 3 4
191. eferring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Color Selection Ready to copy Full Color o 10 10 Copies Paper Zoom m Density selection OA O A40 100 Normal 0 w M re ir GS Duplex uv Combine gp Collate kam La d 1 sided gt 1 sided Off On Select the color mode Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Auto Color Black amp White GB0022_00 QO o i 3 51 _ Color Selection Full Color GB0001_01 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 gt Original Size x MT a Original Orientation al Top Edae on Left 1 4 Eh Original Image i Text Photo Add Edit Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0002_00 Ready to send J lee Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Full Color s Grayscale Black amp White O ir GB0022_01 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Job Finish Notice send e mail notice when a job is complete Scan to Print from User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish NOTE PC should be configured in advance so that E mail can be used Email can be sent to a single destination 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen 2 Press F
192. election S Full Color S Original Image a rons co if f t 1 sided gt gt 1 sided off On oi Text Photo vv Favorites Close Add Edit Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down GBO0001_01 GB0002_00 2 Select the original size 10 10 gt Others Cancel lt Back GB0025_00 GB0026_00 l G Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the original size 3 35 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Original Orientation 0063 USB Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction To use any of the following functions the document s original orientation must be set e Duplex e Combine When placing originals on the platen Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left Top Edge on Top 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Original Orientation Ready to copy Full Color ___ 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies Se ee Original Size B ens Lx AGE per Ba Zoom Density Selection ane mF z J J a Original Orientation A 100 Normal 0 Top Edge on Left Mur es ee ee gt Color Selection 43 Lapi e Full Color he Duplex Z Combine ap Collate Be 4 j ta Original Image 1 sidedSi gt 1 sided Off On Ai Text Photo q Shortcut
193. end it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached NOTE To send the log history by e mail select On of the SMTP settings on the COMMAND CENTER Refer to Sending E mail on page 2 24 1 Display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 lt gt System Menu Counter Q 1 E Counter S 10 10 Admin Report Settings GB0054_00 Result Report Setting Sending Log History gt GB0560_00 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Enter login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard L GB0723_00 2 Configure the function 10 10 Send Log History Co i E Co i Job Log of Auto TE GB0578_00 Refer to Setting the Destination on page 8 9 Automatic Log History Transmission on page 8 10 x Manual Log History Transmission on page 8 10 and Setting E mail Subject on page 8 11 Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History E Setting the Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Sending the Log History on page 8 8 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter LLS Send Log History Auto Sending 1 Off mad gt 3 1 1 Destination i E mail JUV LUY QUVYTLL j l a GB0
194. epresentative When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses 10 17 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages S Error Message Scanner memory is full Checkpoints Corrective Actions Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of scanner Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel the printing job Reference Page Send error An error has occurred during transmission Refer to Responding to Send Error for the error code and corrective actions System error System error has occurred Follow the instructions on the touch panel When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses T Error Message The cover is open Checkpoints Is there any cover which is open Corrective Actions Close the cover indicated on the touch panel Reference Page The phone receiver is off the hook Put down the receiver The power cable is unplugged Disconnect the power cord from the machine and connect it to the multi purpose feeder This memory is not formatted Is the removable memory formatted by this machine Perform Format on this machine Toner is empty C MJ Y K Replace the toner container
195. er the scanner address when the device and computer are connected via a network 2 20 Preparation before Use gt Energy Saver function Energy Saver function Sleep and Auto Sleep Power Q To enter Sleep press the Power key Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator This status is referred to as Sleep Ve If print data is received during Sleep the touch panel lights up and printing starts If you are using the products equipped with the fax function received data is printed out while the operation panel remains unlit To resume press the Power key The machine will be ready to use within 20 seconds Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Sleep Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time The default preset time is 1 minute For more information about configuring settings refer to Sleep Timer on page 9 24 N 2 21 Preparation before Use gt Machine Setup Wizard Machine Setup Wizard The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being installed System Menu Counter 10 10 Welcome This wizard will help you set up your machine To continue press Next gt el Following the instructions on the screen to configure the foll
196. erface Ethernet 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T USB 2 0 Hi Speed USB Network Protocol TCP IP Transmission System PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP FTP over SSL E mail SMTP Scan to E mail transmission TWAIN scan WIA scan Available Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Available Operating System Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Document Processor Description Original Feed Method Automatic feed Supported Original Types Sheet originals Paper Size Maximum Legal A4 Minimum Statement A5 Paper Weight 50 to 120 g m Duplex 50 to 110 g m Loading Capacity 50 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Dimensions W x D x H 19 19 64 x 21 x 4 3 32 490 x 338 x 104 mm Weight 3 kg or less 11 20 Appendix gt Specifications Environmental Specifications Description Time to Sleep mode default setting 1 minutes Recovery time from Sleep mode 20 seconds or less Duplexing Standard Paper supply capability 100 recycled paper may be used NOTE Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types EN ISO 7779 Der h chste Schalldruckpegel betr gt 70 dB A oder weniger gem EN ISO 7779 EK1 ITB 2000 Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen Um st ren
197. es This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 6 Preface gt Notice Warranty the United States FS C2526MFP FS C2626MFP MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY Kyocera Mita America Inc and Kyocera Mita Canada Ltd both referred to as Kyocera warrant the Customer s new Multifunctional Product referred to as MFP and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one 1 year or 200 000 copies prints from date of installation whichever first occurs In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period Kyocera s only obligation and the Customer s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser referred to as the Customer of a new Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada based upon the country of purchase In order to obtain performance of this warranty the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide service write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera Dealer in your area or check Kyocera s website
198. es 9 40 MY P E ee a ucts acdsntennadananigacetessntas odvueuie E E E 9 41 Editing and Deleting Users cccceccccecccsccceeeceeeeceeceeeeceeecaeeseeeeeeesesseeeseueeaueesaeess 9 42 AG OCIA eonenna E E E E NEE E E 9 45 Group AUIMONIZAUON cesetcseeccezsc lt ercescostevebesutacedeceduadatevencstisebeddeandseouncesesseivedecacseteedenensst 9 51 Obtain Network User Property ccccccccccceecceeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeaeeeseesaeesseeeaes 9 55 JOD PAC COMMUNIC oct cepetee tesco ssa ce coeecisscce eet aaced onieeee ETE EER 9 57 First JOD ACCOUMUNG SUD s2scaiesssnccsensdsostrceicnecteccanvncenedexevnsesensuwiessediededeeeedatnaleschess 9 57 Job Accounting Settings sii crcctexcsieaseemesuscasc lt edeasvessseledceoteevsnessanestesasstansonesisblaexeoseudcers 9 59 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting ccccccccceeeceeeeeeecceeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeesaeees 9 60 LOON LEOGOUT aicsoetee secre acdedetteednsteseeedendscseens hace E ae E AEE 9 61 Adding an ACCOUN sorsra E E A E E yaa 9 62 Editing and Deleting Accounts cccccssccssccesceceeeceeeccueececceeeeeeeseeesseesasesaueesaeess 9 64 Restricting the Use of the Machine 2 0 0 0 ccccceccsecceeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeees 9 66 Counting the Number of Pages Printed cccccccccecccseeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeesaeeees 9 68 Printing AN ACCOUNTING Report cc cccccccceeccseeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeesseeeaeeseeseeeseeees 9 70
199. ess No To remove the USB memory press Remove Memory and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely removed message appears Then remove the USB memory Activate Activates the application selected on the list Enter the license key as necessary Deactivate Deactivates the application selected on the list Print Report Prints information on the installed applications The Application Name ID Application ID Version and other information can be checked Delete Internet Deletes the application selected on the list This procedure sets up the Internet browser application Description Specify the proxy settings Value Off On Use Same Proxy Set whether or not the same proxy server is used for all protocols If the same proxy server is not used select Off Value Off On HTTP Proxy Server Set a proxy server HTTP Value Enter the proxy address and port number HTTPS Proxy Server Set a proxy server HTTPS Value Enter the proxy address and port number No Proxy Domains Set domains for which no proxy is used Value Enter the domain name Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Printer Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application software screen However the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine Item Description Emulation
200. estination on One Touch Key nannannennnnnsnnnnnnrrrerrsrrsnrnnrnnrnrrnnrrsrrsnrerrnnrnnrnnrnne 6 33 Adding a Destnatidi ssersirsrsss merienn a aT A E ig 6 33 Editing and Deleting One TOUCH Key c cece cecccceccceeeceeeee cece eeseeseaeeeaeeeseeesaueeaeeeaes 6 35 Se CIN FUNCIONS aeree O E EEE E E EET 6 36 ING E E EA E EAE E E 6 37 Fie SO DORON sernpre E EE E a TR 6 39 Emal SUDCU BONY accssecesecsceb ieee ana a a a i 6 40 FLERENCYIGO TA riire E E E E EEEE 6 41 ALE B SE a EE AE EE E A E A A 6 42 Scanning USING TWAIN scsscedectesetnoseccdecnsecsnuntwedeceboreesetaessusseisasiees adaini iai 6 45 DOCUMENT BOX orror a A E ee ee 7 1 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ccccccceecceeceseeeceeeteeeeeeeeaeeenes 7 2 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB ce cccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenaeeeenees 7 5 Removing USB Memory etscccscauaneicctrakencenedansbsenedaneensoctenenraddesondsoeceenedtmecaniueubesiencewessieeecetec 1 7 Functions for Document BOX acc cdcccetisehesticcccssesccedscrwenendedeastecdadneeeinnceuteddsendbenswuneesstasetoiceeaesens 7 8 DUDIOK serer E ener ener een eee ee ee eee ee eee ee ee eee 7 9 Encrypted PDF PassWord ccctiatescadictacececeedactdndnaddacsusetadderuniensedehiGantSeasuerdendaesoediededbe 7 10 URE a cs 6 eee E en a ee ee 7 11 Pe WOW OS serere rir i EEE EE EEE E E 7 12 1K i 010 ee EE E ene ee eer er ee ey ee re ee eee ee 7 13 SUS JOD CANCEL aneneen a E O
201. ete Value Off On Error Only Canceled before Sending Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent Value Off On Job Finish Notice Setting Sending Log History Attaches sent images to job finish notices Value Do Not Attach Image Attach Image You can send the log history by e mail You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached Refer to Sending the Log History on page 8 8 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information For details on User Login refer to User Login Administration on page 9 32 Description User Name Changes the name shown on the user list Up to 32 characters can be entered Login User Name Displays the login user name that is entered at login Login Password Changes the password that is entered at login Up to 64 characters can be entered Access Level Displays the user s access level Account Name Displays the account to which the user belongs E mail Address Changes the user s e mail address Up to 128 characters can be entered Simple Login When simple login is enabled changes associated settings My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in Network users are not displayed
202. ethods of both the sender and the recipient Failed to send via FTP Check the network e The network cable is connected e The hub is not operating properly e The server is not operating properly 3201 Failed to send the e mail Check the SMTP user authentication method of the recipient 10 20 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Corrective Actions Reference Page Turn the main power switch off and back on If this error occurs several times make a note of the displayed error code and contact your service representative 10 21 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs the touch panel will display Paper jam and the machine will stop Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper How to read the screen ee 10 10 Paper jam Open the rear cover Open the fuser cover i and remove the paper Displays the current Close the rear cover step Displays the processing method JAM 0501 GE0148_00 el lt Back Returns to the previous step Next gt Advances to the next step Hold Puts the current step on hold and switchs to the Status screen The status of jobs can be checked Refer to Checking Job Status on page 8 2 Paper Jam Location Detailed paper jam positions are as follows Refer to the indicated page number to remove the paper jam Paper Jam
203. f On Warning Emit a sound when errors occur Value Off On Key Confirmation USB Keyboard Original Settings Custom Original Size Emit a sound when a key on the optional USB keyboard is pressed Value Off On Description Set up frequently used custom original size The custom size option is displayed on the screen when selecting original size Value Inch models X 1 97 to 14 02 in 0 01 increments Y 1 97 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments Metric models X 50 to 356 mm in 1 mm increments Y 50 to 216 mm in 1 mm increments Default Original Size In the screen for setting the original size select the paper size to be used as the default value Value Metric Select from A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 or Folio inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio Il others 16K Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Paper Settings Item Custom Paper Size Description Set up frequently used custom paper size The custom size option is displayed on the screen when selecting paper size Value Inch models Cassette 1 size X 4 13 to 8 50 Y 5 83 to 14 02 Cassette 2 to 3 size X 3 62 to 8 50 Y 6 38 to 14 02 MP tray size X 2 76 to 8 50 Y 5 83 to 14 02 Metric models Cassette 1 size X 105 to 216 mm Y 148 to 356 mm Cassette 2 to 3 size X 92 to 216 mm Y 162 to 356 mm MP tray size X 70 to 216 mm Y 148 to 356 mm Media Type Setting Selec
204. f Cla mab Ene cemadantane re ee ee Ee 6 11 Sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Control Panel Home Help protect your computer with Windows Firewall Allow a program or feature Windows Firewall can help prevent hackers or malicious software from gaining access to your computer through Windows Firewall through the Internet or a network Change notification settings How does a firewall help protect my computer Turn Windows Firewall on or What are network locations E Restore default Q Home or work private networks Connected Networks at home or work where you know and trust the people and devices on the network TIUUMICSIIUUL Ty network Windows Firewall state On Incoming connections Block all connections to programs that are not on the list of allowed programs 3 Windows Firewall with Advanced Security File Action View Help e gt 0E mo Advance fu Connection Security Rules Pg Windows Firewall with Advanced Security provides network security for Windows computers Import Policy b Monitoring amp Export Policy __ Restore Default Policy Domain Profile Diagnose Repair Windows Firewall is on View gt 98 Inbound connections that do not match a rule are blocked Outbound connections that do not match a rule are allowed Private Profile is Active Windows Firewall is on Go D E 2 a B raon ra
205. f completed jobs Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs and Storing Jobs The following job histories are available Print Job Log Copy Send Job Log FAX Printer Folder SMB FTP FAX reception E mail E mail reception Application Printing from Document Box Mixed Multiple destination Job Report List Store Job Log Scan Printing data from removable FAX memory Printer Application NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status Job Cancel Fees 2 I Job Log gt 2 4 Psoe Job Log 1 sere Waiting V4 Pause All Print Jobs GB0052_01 Use VV or A to scroll up and down Press either of Print Job Log Send Job Log or Store Job Log to check the log 2 Check the log Status Job Cancel 10 10 0011 doc0000112010081817 Completed OK 0010 doc0000102010081815 amp Canceled 7 1 3 0009 doc0000092010081815 amp Completed 5 0008 doc apo Error V GB0186_00 Displays details for individual jobs Press Close to exit the screen NOTE The job history can be sent by E mail For details refer to Sending the Log History on page 8 8 N Status Job Cancel gt Sending the Log History Sending the Log History You can send the log history by e mail You can either s
206. fiber lint or that is especially delicate Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine Choose paper with a smooth and even surface however avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80 pulp i e not more than 20 of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers 11 11 Appendix gt Paper Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine Measurements in the table take into account a 0 7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width Corner angles must be 90 0 2 Multi Purpose Tray B6 186 x 128 mm Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray A4 297 x 210 mm Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 A5 210 x 148 mm Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 A6 148 x 105 mm Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 B5 257 x 182 mm Envelope Monarch 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 Folio 210 x 330 mm Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm Letter Hagaki 100 x 148mm Legal Oufukuhagaki 148 x 200 mm Statement Youkei 4
207. format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies PPM prints per minute This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute Printer Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software The printer driver for the machine is contained in the DVD enclosed in the package Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine RA Stateless The IPv6 router communicates transmits information such as the global address prefix using ICMP v6 This information is the Router Advertisement RA ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 for the Internet Protocol Version 6 IPv6 Specification Send as E mail A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E mail attachment E mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time 11 24 Appendix gt Glossary SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for E mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers Status Page The page lists machine conditions such as the memory capacity total number of prints and scans and paper source settings Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask rep
208. g gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents This setting specifies that documents such as Private Printing or Proof and Hold Printing saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time Off Temporary documents are not automatically deleted However the temporary documents will be deleted when the power is turned off 1 hour Documents are deleted after 1 hour 4 hours Documents are deleted after 4 hours 1 day Documents are deleted after 1 day 1 week Documents are deleted after 1 week NOTE This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set Regardless of this function setting temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off 4 Display the screen 10 10 s e FAX System Menu Counter 10 10 X Favorites e E 1 1 T Box System Menu Counter Quick Copy Job Retention i 1 Sub Address Box GB0054_02 Lm 37inh s GB0290_00 Deletion of Job Retention Off GB0310_00 2 Select the time 10 10 Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0312_00 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer 9 12 6 sending This chapter explains the following topics BASIC MDS AUOMN eece csc ccese tase wees E E TE aes asd fase arontsanacenentaanqate an tecnecaueaesene tesnceaucacmasuaec ste tusse
209. ge Ready to copy Full Color E 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies EI De Cy Original Size b Paper Ba Zoom all Density X A4 Selection _ lt q Original Orientation A4 100 Normal 0 gt j Top Edge on Left a G o reo _ Color Selection L Duplex vw Combine gp Collate Sod 4 i B 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off On Add Edit Shortcut GB0001_01 GB0002_00 a Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the image quality Copy Send Scan to USB Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 ABC ABCE ih A Text Photo Photo Text Photo Photo Graphic Map Printer Output O o ir GB0037_01 GB0037_02 3 45 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Sharpness USB Adjust the sharpness of the image When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward Sharpen When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos in which moire patterns appear edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward Blur Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots Less Sharp More Sharp 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Sharpness ___ 10 10 10 10 Copies i oe crs 2S
210. ge 9 24 Error Clear Timer page 9 24 Unusable Time refer to Fax Operation Guide X X Adjustment Density Adjustment Copy page 9 24 Maintenance page 9 age 9 24 24 Wee ee Send Box page 9 24 Background Density Copy Auto page 9 24 Adj page 9 24 Send Box Auto page 9 24 Toner Save Level Copy page 9 24 EcoPrint page 9 24 Printer page 9 24 Auto Color Correction page 9 24 Correcting Black Line page 9 24 Display Brightness page 9 24 Color Registration page 9 25 Drum Refresh page 9 25 Calibration page 9 25 Service Setting Test Page DEV SET DEV CLN Altitude Adjustment page 9 25 MC page 9 25 FAX Country Code FAX Call Settings Exchange Selection refer to Fax Operation Guide Europe Only PBX Setting Dial No to PSTN refer to Fax Operation Guide XX 1 Preface This chapter explains the following topics NOO aan a E cases ms nne poner saceecannccsec oats cane sabaraeseeenonb segues ase coecnnesteneteaee E E 1 2 Safety Conventions in THIS Guide ccccecceeccssceceeeceeecea ceca cececceeeeaseccueecacecseecauecsuecsueecseesseeeeetesseessassaas 1 2 ENVION sarc nacanceasaadarasacaduanneudet oancrunase catacvmaveden ances aapaienaeduumbe lamatennienasst E 1 3 Frocautons TOR USO occcesa cele tees waite ae poses e EE ATE a a eai e EEE SEN EA aE EEE EEEN EES 1 3 Le al
211. ge 9 76 Wide A4 page 9 16 Form Feed TimeOut page 9 76 LF Action page 9 76 CR Action page 9 76 Paper Feed Mode page 9 77 Gloss Mode page 9 17 XVIII System page 9 78 Network page 9 78 Host Name page 9 78 TCP IP Settings page TCP IP page 9 78 9 18 IPv4 Settings page 9 78 IPv6 Settings page 9 79 Protocol Detail page 9 20 Netware page 9 27 AppleTalk page 9 27 WSD Scan page 9 27 WSD Print page 9 27 Enhanced WSD page 9 27 Enhanced WSD SSL page 9 27 IPSec page 9 22 Secure Protocol page SSL page 9 22 9 22 IPP Security page 9 22 HTTP Security page 9 22 LDAP Security Ext Address Book page 9 22 LDAP Security User Property page 9 22 LAN Interface page 9 22 Interface Block Setting page 9 22 USB Host page 9 22 USB Device page 9 22 Optional Interface 1 page 9 22 Optional Interface 2 page 9 22 Optional Interface page 9 22 Security Level page 9 4 Restart page 9 4 RAM Disk Setting page 9 23 Optional Memory page 9 23 Optional Function page 11 5 Date Timer page 9 23 Date Time page 9 23 Date Format page 9 23 Time Zone page 9 23 Auto Panel Reset page 9 23 Auto Error Clear page 9 23 Panel Reset Timer page 9 23 Sleep Timer pa
212. gistering Destinations in the Address Book 2 Confirm the connection status 10 10 1 2 Port 21 Login User Name 1 abc GB0709_03 Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry Ready to send 10 10 Host Name abe Login User Name abc GB0709_03 Register the destination 10 10 Name Sales department 1 Address Number Auto E mail Address GB0078_02 Cancel 6 27 2 Connection Test 10 10 GB0696_00 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Adding a Group Compile two or more contacts into a group Designations in the group can be added at the same time When adding a group a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book Before adding a group in the Address Book the contacts to be included in the group must be added first NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Designations in the group can also be registered in the system menu 1 Display the screen 10 10 J Dest 0 Check Send Heare Ext Address Book GB0055_00 i One Touch Key IF 1 2 _ femal Ready to send 10 10 B 001 pa 123456 123456 ce 001 123456 123 456789 co G 1 1 J001 g 123456 12345 com uw 001 123456 11111 com GB0426_01 d a 2
213. gt Printing from Applications Printing from Applications This section provides basic instructions for printing documents Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 7 You can print documents created on your computer once you install the printer driver from the included DVD Product Library Refer to Installing Software on page 2 15 N For more information about how to configure advanced printer driver settings and print documents refer to the Printer Driver Operation Guide on the DVD 1 Display the window r T Adobe Reader Edit View Document Tools Window Help L Open Ctrl O 103 z lea Find X Create Adobe PDE Using Acrobat com i Collaborate gt Save a Copy Shift Ctrl S Save as Text Attach to Email Close Ctrl W Properties Ctrl D Digital Editions Drint Cetin Chifts CtrlsD H Print Ctp e TTT TT ee TT TT oe eG GG CG dS Click File and select Print in the application 2 Configure the printer 7 Print Printer Name Properties 2 Status I Type Document and Markups Kr Print Range Preview Composite All K 210 02 _ _ __ Current view Current pag Pages 1 Subset All pages in rang Reverse pages Page Handling Copies 1 Collate 297 01 Page Scaling Shrink to Printable Area nS v Auto Rotate and Center Choose paper source by PDF page size Use custom paper size when needed
214. gures machine system settings Network Configures network settings Host Name Item Description Host Name Check the host name of the machine TCP IP Settings Description TCP IP Set up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Value Off On IPv4 Settings Set up TCP IP IPv4 to connect to the network The IPv4 setting is available when selecting On for TCP IP DHCP Select whether or not to use the DHCP IPv4 server Value Off On Bonjour Select whether or not to use Bonjour Value Off On Auto IP Select whether or not to use Auto IP Value Off On IP Address Set the IP addresses When the DHCP setting is On the current IP address is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an IP address set the DHCP setting to Off Value HH HHH HHH HHH Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet masks When the DHCP setting is On the current Subnet Mask is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an Subnet Mask set the DHCP setting to Off Value HH HHH HHH HHH Default Gateway Set the IP gateway addresses When the DHCP setting is On the current Default Gateway is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an Default Gateway set the DHCP setting to Off Value HHH HHH HHH HHH After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu IPv6 Settings Description Set up TCP IP
215. heckpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Job Accounting restriction Is the acceptable printing count The printing count exceeded the exceeded restricted by Job Accounting acceptable count restricted by Job exceeded Accounting Cannot print any more This job is canceled Press End When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses K Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page KPDL error PostScript error has occurred The job is canceled Press End When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Low temperature Adjust room Adjust the temperature and the humidity 1 3 temp of your room 10 15 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages Error Message Machine failure Checkpoints Corrective Actions Internal error has occurred Make a note of the error code displayed on the touch panel and contact your Service Representative Reference Page Maximum number of scanned pages Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded Only one copy of the scanned pages is available Press Continue to print send or store the scanned pages Press Cancel to cancel printing sending or storing Memory is full Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up P
216. hone 46 8 546 550 00 Fax 46 8 546 550 10 www kyoceramita se UNITED KINGDOM KYOCERA MITA UK Ltd 8 Beacontree Plaza Gillette Way Reading Berkshire RG2 OBS Phone 44 1189 311 500 Fax 44 1189 311 108 www kyoceramita co uk KYOCERA MITA WORLDWIDE JAPAN KYOCERA MITA Corporation Head Office 2 28 1 Chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 81 6 6764 3555 Fax 81 6 6764 3980 www kyoceramita com USA KYOCERA MITA America INC Head office 225 Sand Road P O Box 40008 Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 USA Phone 1 973 808 8444 Fax 1 973 882 6000 www kyoceramita com us KYOCERA CORPORATION JAPAN KYOCERA CORPORATION Corporate Headquarters 6 Takeda Tobadono cho Fushimi ku Kyoto 612 8501 Japan Phone 81 75 604 3500 Fax 81 75 604 3501 www kyocera co jp X KYOCERA KSUCERd First Edition 2011 05 2M8KMENOOO
217. ic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send S 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Se z al Dest Q Check sy Sending Size Recall j _check Gt Same as Original Size File Separation 3 Off One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book Address Book i Scan Resolution 1 2 dpi a Pi 2 300x300dpi To EA RG _ Folder Normal 0 es E mail a vv Favorites Eau z Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function 10 10 e i d E 6 39 GB0081_01 sending gt Sending Functions E mail Subject Body Add subject and body when sending a document NOTE The subject can include up to 60 characters and the body can include up to 500 characters 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 e Dest Q Recall Check ep E mail Subject Body ee ao 2 Job Finish Notice 2 One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book lt gt m FTP Encrypted TX 1 2 FAX Delayed Transmission E mail Folder FAX V ox a or fV Shortcut Use VV or AN to scroll up and down GB0055_00 GB0081_04 2 Enter the subject 3 Ready to send 10 10 Input Body 4 a GB0088_00 GB0057_19 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters Enter the body Ready
218. ice when in Sleep Wake the device from Sleep before continuing Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 21 Fax functionality can only be used on products equipped with fax capability WIA driver cannot be installed on Windows XP Installing Printer Driver Ensure the machine is plugged in and connected to the PC before installing the printer driver from the DVD Installing Printer Driver in Windows If you are connecting this machine to a Windows PC follow the next steps to install the printer driver The example shows you how to connect your machine to a Windows 7 PC NOTE If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays select Cancel If the autorun screen is displayed click Run Setup exe If the user account management window appears click Allow You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software Express Mode automatically detects connected machines and installs the required software Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed For details refer to Custom Installation in the Printer Driver Operation Guide on the DVD 4 Insert the DVD 2 Display the screen r x r nl iS Kyocera Product Library S iS Kyocera Product Library Se KYOCERA THE NEW VALUE FRONTIER KYOCERA THE NEW VALUE FRONTIER Install Software gt advan ools Hardware Documentation Software Documentation Software Release Notes Notice By
219. ick the scannerdata folder and click Share and Advanced sharing Click the Advanced Sharing button In Windows XP right click the scannerdata folder and select Sharing and Security or Sharing sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 2 Configures permission settings E Advanced Sharing V Share this folder 1 Settings Share name scannerdata Limit the number of simultaneous users to 20 Comments 2 Permissions J caching x cae _ apy In Windows XP select Share this folder and click the Permissions button 2 G Permissions for scannerdata Share Permissions Group or user names e ene 3 Select Users or Groups Select this object type Users Groups or Built in security principals Object Types From this location PCoo1 Locations 2 TT i mples a 3 ost Enter the user name in the text box Click the Location button and select the desired location To select the search target click a location to select it When you are a member of a domain your current domain will be set as the search target by default 6 8 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 4 Permissions for scannerdata EF Share Permissions Group or user names ka Ey JannE PCO01 PCO01 james smith 1 Add Remove
220. ide About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters Chapter Preface Contents Includes information about operating precautions trademarks and this manual Preparation before Use Provides information about part names connecting cables and setting up and configuring the machine Common Operations Explains overall machine operation including loading paper and originals and logging in and out Copying Describes the functions you can use when copying Printing Provides information about functionality that is available when using the machine as a printer Sending Describes the functions you can use when sending originals Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes Status Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission Setup Registration and User Management Explains system menu functionality related to overall machine operation job accounting and user management Troubleshooting Explains how to respond to error indications such as when the machine runs out of toner and problems such as paper jams Appendix Explains how to enter characters and lists the machine specifications Introduces the convenient optional equipment avai
221. ili doc0000162010082913 e GB0184_00 Display Key Details 1 Icons that indicate the job type i Storing Job Scan Storing Job Printer B Storing Job FAX W 2 Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key 3 Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information 4 Status of job E Storing Data TT Pausing the job or error Canceling the job The status before starting to save such as during scanning originals 5 Close Closes the Store Job Status screen NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Scheduled Job screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0014 1233 GB0185_00 Display Key Details Icons that indicate the job type B Sending Job FAX Menu Pressing this key displays Start Now Select the job you wish to send immediately and then press Menu followed by Start Now Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information Status of job Sending Waiting Close Closes the Scheduled Job screen NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job History Checking Job History Check the history o
222. ily Registering Shortcuts You can register up to 2 shortcuts for copying functions sending functions and functions set for document box The following types of shortcuts are available Private Shortcut Private shortcuts are only available for use by the logged in user They can only be set while using user login administration Shared Shortcut Shared shortcuts can be used by all machine users When using user login administration shared shortcuts can only be set by users who have logged in as administrators 1 Display the screen Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies 1 Sy ES Sey W Original Size a a A4 Paper Ba Zoom al Density ee Selection 3 l Original Orientation A40 100 Normal 0 Si Top Edge on Left M es a ee Mr gt _ Color Selection J 3 Full Color a Duplex Combine gp Collate 7 4 ens ta Original Image 1 sided gt 1 sided Off On ei Press Functions on the Copy Send or Document Box screen and then Add Edit Shortcut LLLI ha Add Edit Shortcut j GB0001_01 GB0002_00 2 Select Add 10 10 Add GB0790_00 3 Select the key 10 10 Private Shortcut 1 Private Shortcut 2 Shared Shortcut 1 Shared Shortcut 2 Cancel Next gt GB0791_00 Select the key to which you wish to register the shortcut NOTE If you select a shortcut number already registered the
223. inal Size H J E ae File L Duplex J Scan L Format _ 1 Resolution zz Original Orientation PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi mal Top Edae on Left ee ee 1 3 a N gt cai Storing Size ae il Density a File Name PXH Same as Original Size j a Enty Color Selection Normal doc s Full Color GB0096_00 GB0098_00 C Cancel Add Edi _ Shortcut j Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the storing size Same as Original Size 10 10 gt Inch gt Others gt a L S GB0132_00 Document Box gt Functions for Document Box Metric inch or Others Ready to store in Box 10 10 Ready to store in Box 10 10 Same as Metric gt Original Size 1 Others Cancel lt Back GB0132_01 GB0133_00 v a i S Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the desired size 8 Status Job Cancel This chapter explains the following topics CHECKING Ol US arn A E E E E E 8 2 Details of the Status Screens isswcnccscdacwsucteudneseorsenceusunesnweeudecaendbieunaieuncnnedatvawhsudeuseusdeusshedweensSbwnnedtidactewdeweenes 8 3 GNECKNO JOD HIIS ION wes cara inet enncasmnnts coetdnacwtacadanceeacet enact E E EEE 8 7 Sending the Log HISTON ssiissssscnsneneniindor nn ae as solrearvedtaa ten eeii aiene aa aiia 8 8 SGO Me SSM AUION eani een reer E Ea E EE cave EO T 8 9 Automatic Log History Transmission ccccscceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeesseueesaeeesauee
224. ination contact or group from the Address Book You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key 6 33 Sending gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key 5 You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search Address Book All System Menu Counter 10 10 ae 10 10 liza Sales department 1 Narrow Down Sales department 1 abc ew gt Search Name p 5 1 2 i gt Support department 0234567 ee gt Search No Sort Name rae Support department BOX om gt I WA GB0429_00 GB0396_00 Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group Use V or AN to scroll up and down Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number Enter the One Touch Key name System Menu Counter 10 10 Address Book All Ive liga Sales department 1 0123456 Sales department 1 Input 18 Limit 24 ABC wa EJ ajwiefr rjy ulifole atsjo jrjetutul xe k z xleflvls nfjn n Cancel lt Back Nex gt al Sales department 1 abc ew gt 1 2 lt gt Support department 0234567 ew gt Support department BOX 1 ew gt V i Up to 24 characters can be entered GB0057_18 OO GB0429_00 Refer to Character Entry Method on page
225. ineadenemnicinebaaieneideiadanaahodiai nd weiicadinnaatinninlelvis a Ra EE aE 9 32 First User Login Administration icisciescancecdaneedcassaderinnGudaeeeaandea ved ianenelaesnainses nest dndadabus ys endviwdendadedeeenetawetenans 9 32 voer LOGIN CUNS essre E E E E E E A ndeimetoutaets 9 33 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration cccccccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeessaeeeeaeeeeeeas 9 34 Local User AUtRO ZaUOM sss n a a a aa E a E aaa a aaia vate 9 40 Padmo USOT cece se E A E 9 36 Editing and Deleting Users sacdccsicsd ssncosmantssncrcuntt sonennestecuneieninel aadavaianeuncrausds maidens lvkoudetbilinnaagenaiabncudnidiamecadsge 9 42 SEILO T seee dociteten coc E E E EEE E E ences anundemeers 9 45 Group AUtHONZATON eee ea amen ranae a ee ne eee ee ee ee eee eee 9 51 Obtain Network User Property cccccssscccceseecceececceaceecseeeeceseecsuseeeceeesseaeeessageessgeeessaueeesueesssegeessags 9 55 SOT FN COUN ONN Seisin gas acca eater igen eee nd ices E E 9 57 ISU OO PAC COUN SGD secen e A aE AA E ARE ANa 9 57 J b Accounting Settings sarrseoseirins nan a aAA EE E EE ENE a AE ANE AAE EE 9 59 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting cccccecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeseesseeeeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeas 9 60 LOO LOGOUT reei r E E E E eee eee eee 9 61 PANO NAC OUI sasoe EEA E E E E tacue ey edsaneaemeesaenete 9 62 Editing and Deleting Accounts ici ccccnnncssedenancntseeceanceasscatades
226. ines appear the value to High 2 in the image 10 10 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom The altitude is 1500 m or higher and dots appear in the image Checkpoints Corrective Actions Set Altitude Adjustment to High 1 If there is still no improvement change the value to High 2 Reference Page Skewed color printout ABC Run Calibration Run Color Registration Colors appear different than you anticipated Did you choose appropriate image quality for the original Select appropriate image quality Have you loaded color copy paper into the paper tray Load color copy paper into the paper tray Run Calibration 9 25 10 11 When making copies Adjust the color balance 4 15 When printing from a computer Adjust the color using the printer driver Printer Driver Operation Guide Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom Cannot send via SMB Checkpoints Is the network cable connected Corrective Actions Connect the correct network cable securely Reference Page Have the network settings for the equipment been configured properly Configure the TCP IP settings properly Have the folder sharing settings been configured properly Check sharing settings and access privileges under the folder properties Has the SMB protocol been set to On Set the SMB protocol
227. ing gt Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Adding a Destination on One Touch Key Add a new destination contact or group on One Touch Key Adding a Destination Add a new destination contact or group A maximum of 100 destinations can be registered To register a destination to a One Touch Key it must first be registered in the Address Book Register one or more destinations as needed before proceeding 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down rt gt System Menu Counter HEE a E Address Book One Touch 4 5 s User Login Job Accounting l 3 Printer VY System Menu Counter Address Book gt 1 GB0054_03 10 10 gt One Touch Key Address Book Defaults gt Print List gt GB0411_00 2 Add a One Touch Key 002 None 1 003 None 005 None 006 None 008 None 009 None 011 None 012 None Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination and press lt GB0422_00 3 Select the destinations Address Book All IYE 10 10 Searches by destination name fig Sales department 1 0123456 cm rrr Advanced search by type of registered destination E ales departmen aDC 5 Imi aati mail Folder SMB FTP FAX or Group gt Support department 0234567 ew gt E support department BOX es gt v Use VY or A to scroll up and down Displays details for individual destinations GB0429_00 Select one dest
228. ion by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key Ready to send 10 10 Sales department 1 Address Number E mail Address Cancel GB0786_00 Change the information as needed by pressing the item in question 6 31 Use V or A to scroll up and down Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Ready to send 10 10 Name Sales department 1 Address Number Auto E mail Address GB0786_00 g To delete a member group To delete a member from a group select the destination you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon 10 10 Ready to send E Name Support department 2f la Sales department 1 0123456 a Address Number Auto 1 Support department 0234567 Member Member 2 GB0787_00 a 4 1 EL Ready to send 10 10 pol send gt Support department 0234567 a Cancel Em WQ Sj Menu End el E O To delete See 10 10 Ready to send Address Book All Iva 019 2 Sales department 1 Support department I SYSTEM DEP Cancel GB0396_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 4 a Select the destination contacts or group to delete 6 32 fh Sales department 1 Member 2 am 1 1 Name Support department Address Number Auto Member Member 1 Delete t GB0114_04 10 10 10 10 k 01 GB0788_00 Send
229. ional Equipment ccccccsecccescceeeceeeceueceueeceecuceceuecsuecsueeceueseuecsueessuesseessueseaeeseeegas 11 2 FADER FORO paeran E E A EE EA scenes eacedenetenece 11 2 Expansion Memory sc cerasnisceiscinaiciotsemosmaetaccecctwalstete4icioaiestae de encdlscteodria naire sieetsndieadieiguna dcdbiecue ndlendbacieuee des eeniedeeSwheclevselecas 11 3 CAC POTION KN oee E E E E ono sasee saroncan nec E E E 11 4 ICO IE E Memel BOAO usmiate ere ere eE E Ee a Neaga AEE a aeaa E REESE EE EESE EEEE En ENESE 11 4 WOE IRC YOON sorire E E E E E E E E E A E 11 4 OPUNE UMC UOI arreo inr iE E EENE E EE E EET E EEE EE 11 5 CMARAGIEE ENUN INO srcane ee E EEEE a E AE EE 11 7 POOT eE E E EEE EEE E E E E R A 11 10 Basie Papar SPECINCGAUONS ssesssiidimn nani i ae ae A a e a ar as 11 11 Choosing the Appropriate Paper 0 0 ccccccccceccceecceeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeteeeeenees 11 11 SPECAL AD CI a assis ca one oa piesaes g ancis ease nee vee se Ses aeeac cam weqneaeb asi canbetanseeaeeenens 11 14 SPOCIE ATON een en eer EE nn ees E ee eee eee te eee eee ee ae eee 11 18 WAGGING eapo E E E E E E E E E E EE E Ea 11 18 A C a E E E A E EE A E E E E E E A E E E E E E T 11 19 SECANO ae E E E E E E aan eoee 11 20 DOCUMENLPIOCOSSOT siresjsercusctuscespeaseconsn eae an nE eaa E cide a EA iE aa aeaaaee niets 11 20 Environmental SDCCINCAUOMS sorires Enne a aa ee aaa ae Edota i iaa 11 21 CO SSA EE E E E A E EE EE T E E E E A E E A E E
230. is turned on and click Reload If the Windows security window appears click Install this driver software anyway 4 Finish the installation Installer Installation Completed Installation details Ew Iv Print a test page M Enable Status Monitor z M Show Quick Print tab Set Quick Print tab as default xi KYOCERA This completes the printer driver installation procedure Follow the on screen instructions to restart the system if required You can install the WIA driver using Custom Mode if the machine and computer are connected via a network The TWAIN driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network If you are installing the TWAIN driver or WIA driver continue by configuring the TWAIN driver 2 19 or WIA driver 2 20 2 16 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh The machine s printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer NOTE When printing from a Macintosh computer set the machine s emulation to KPDL or KPDL Auto For details about the configuration method refer to Printer on page 9 16 If connecting by Bonjour enable Bonjour in the machine s network settings For details refer to Network on page 9 18 In the Authenticate screen enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system AppleTalk icon is not displayed on Mac OS X 10 6 1 Insert the DVD Double
231. ith or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 1 9 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED T
232. ive Adjustment Dirt on the print side of the Is the platen or the document Clean the platen or the document 10 6 paper processor dirty processor Dirt on the top edge or back Is the paper transfer unit dirty Clean the transfer unit 10 7 of the paper Printouts are fuzzy Is the machine being used in very Use in an environment that has 1 3 humid conditions suitable humidity Part of the image is Open and then close the rear cover periodically faint or shows white lines Run Drum Refresh 9 25 Copies have a moire pattern Is the original a printed photograph Set the image quality to Photo 3 45 dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly Printouts are not clear Did you choose appropriate image Select appropriate image quality 3 45 quality for the original 10 9 Troubleshooting gt Solving Malfunctions Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Printouts have black lines Is the slit glass dirty Clean the slit glass 10 6 ABC 123 Images are skewed Are the originals placed correctly When placing originals on the platen 3 10 align them with the original size indicator plates When placing originals in the 3 11 document processor align the original width guides securely before placing the originals Is the paper loaded correctly Check the position of the paper width 3 2 guides When displaying an image Have you selected 200 x 100dpi Select
233. ix gt Paper Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 17 however its whiteness may be considered separately NOTE Before purchasing recycled paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality Coated Paper Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than plain paper Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing The surface of high quality or medium quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making the paper surface smoother These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side The coated side appears slightly glossy Q IMPORTANT When printing on coated paper in very humid environments ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine If printing in very humid environments set coated paper for one sheet each Paper Type Indicators If you are going to load non standard paper in the paper feeder multi purpose fold the provided paper type indicator sheet into thirds so that the appropriate paper type symbol faces out and is at the top and insert it into the cassette s display folder PX Envelopes Thick paper Labels V7 Coated paper The blank sheet can be used to write in any name or symbol When writing in a name or symb
234. kei 2 Envelope 10 Loading height Envelope DL Envelope 9 Envelope Monarch Youkei 4 40 mm Envelopes Multi Purpose tray Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain Preprinted Labels Bond 50 80 g m Recycled Rough Vellum Letterhead Color Prepunched Coated High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio Il A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 16k Other sizes Portrait 2 76 to 8 50 or 70 to 216 mm Landscape 5 83 to 14 02 or 148 to 356 mm A4 JIS B5 A5 Folio Legal Letter Oficio Il Statement Executive A6 B6 ISO B5 16K Other sizes Portrait 2 76 to 8 50 or 70 to 216 mm Landscape 5 83 to 14 02 or 148 to 356 mm Thick paper Postcards Oufuku Hagaki return postcard Postcards 100 x 148 mm Return postcard 148 x 200 mm Envelopes ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Youkei 4 Youkei 2 Other sizes Portrait 2 76 to 8 50 or 70 to 216 mm Landscape 5 83 to 14 02 or 148 to 356 mm Transparency OHP film Letter A4 11 10 Appendix gt Paper Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular dry copiers and page printers such as laser printers It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix Be careful when choosing paper Paper unsuitable for the m
235. l Select the folder where the file will be stored and press Menu and then Store File GB0107_00 The machine will display the top 3 folder levels including the root folder To return to a higher level folder press lt Back NOTE Up to 100 documents and folders can be displayed for each directory If the number of documents and folders in a directory exceeds 100 you will be unable to save additional documents Select the functions Ready to store in Box 10 10 4 ge M a E File Duplex Scan CH Format be Resolution PDF 1 sided 300x300dpi D Eo ry Density L File Name mi abf Enty Normal 0 doc C s Functions Cancel Select the function to use for Document Box GB0096_00 Press Functions to display other functions For details refer to Functions for Document Box on page 7 8 X Start storing Start Press the Start key to start storing Remove the USB memory For details refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7 7 7 6 Document Box gt Removing USB Memory Removing USB Memory Certain operations must be performed on the screen before USB memory can be removed Q IMPORTANT Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory 1 Display the screen 10 10 IDocumentBox ssi Box Document Job Box mm Removable Memory J 1 1 1 Sa Sub Address Box Address Box Polling Box ool Box GB0051_00 2 Select Remove
236. l is reset is set with the Panel Reset mm Timer Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user In the Auto Error Clear mode automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses For details refer to Responding to Error Messages on page 10 13 Value Off On Panel Reset Timer If you select On for Auto Panel Reset set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset Value 5 to 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Panel Reset the time display does not appear 9 23 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Sleep Timer Description Set amount of time before entering Sleep Value 1 to 240 minutes 1 minute increments NOTE If you select Off for Auto Sleep the time display does not appear Error Clear Timer If you select On for Auto Error Clear set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors Value 5 to 495 seconds every five seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Error Clear the time display does not appear Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance Item Description Density Adjustment Adjust density Copy Adjust copy density Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Value 3 Lighter 2 1 O Normal 1 2 3 Darker Send Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the
237. lable for this machine Provides information on media types and paper sizes Also includes a glossary of terms Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the operation panel keys or a computer screen Press the Start key Regular Indicates the touch panel keys Press OK Italic Indicates a message displayed on the touch panel Ready to copy is displayed For more information refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 27 NOTE Used to emphasize a key word phrase or references to additional information Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference IMPORTANT Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid problems Q IMPORTANT Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to deal with it CAUTION A CAUTION Preface gt About this Operation Guide Job types for which each function can be set are shown with icons Description This function can be set while copying a document Ready to copy Full Color Paper Selection A40 Duplex 10 10 Copies SSW aa B Zoom il Density 100 Normal 0 M re Mr rs Combine gp Collate Off On wy Favorites i A 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Copy Screen Description This function can
238. ld be entered for the Path In the example window above scannerdata projectA is the Path 6 10 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges 1 Check file and printer sharing 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security and Allow a program through Windows Firewall Control Panel Home Aon Canc e System and Security Review your computer s status and resolve issues Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Restore your computer to an earlier time Network and Internet Hardware and Sound a Windows Firew4 Check firewall status Programs User Accounts and Family i System Safety View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Appearance and W Allow remote access See the name of this computer W Device Manager Personalization Windows Update i 87 Clock Language and Region amp Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates SoS a NOTE If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button 2 r P Windows Firewall Allowed Programs x Search Contro Panel Allow programs to communicate through Windows Firewall To add change or remove al
239. le Name Entry Set an automatically entered name default for jobs Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No can also be set Value File Name Up to 32 characters can be entered Additional Info None Date and Time Job No Job No amp Date and Time Date and Time amp Job No E mail Subject Body Set the subject and body automatically entered default subject and body when sending the scanned originals by E mail Value Subject Up to 60 characters can be entered Body Up to 500 characters can be entered FTP Encrypted TX Set the default value for document encryption during transmission Value Off On NOTE This setting is displayed when the secure protocol SSL setting is On JPEG TIFF Print Select the image size resolution when printing JPEG or TIFF file Value Paper Size Image Resolution Print Resolution XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function Value Off On Detail Settings Image Quality Set the default value for the image quality adjustment range when selecting the file format with which to send and store images Value 1 Low High Comp 2 3 4 5 High Low Comp PDF A Set the default value for PDF A when selecting the file format with which to send and store images Value Off PDF A 1a PDF A 1b Ifyou want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Preset Limit Item
240. ll up and down System Menu Counter oe lt gt System Menu Counter Bessem A Ea Date Timer 2 5 5 f J 1 System Menu Counter 10 10 Correcting Black Line on Display Brightness 3 GB0054_04 Color Registration lone Curve A mon System Menu Counter 10 10 l gt Detail 4 gt GB0629_01 GB0641_00 2 Print the chart 10 10 Print Chart Registration gt GB0642_00 A chart is printed On the chart for each of M magenta C cyan and Y yellow 3 chart types are printed on one sheet H L left V vertical H R right 9 26 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Chart Example Color Registration Correction Chart g a ME MH R J IGECA13579 IGECA13579 HFDBO2 468 HFDBO2 468 qn HAN nn wort ower Pa AH ADFRFNOCWUOM IGECAI135 ms 9 HFDBO2 4 8 i BP ge ae HFODBO2 4 8 A NAANA o ununure PaANQAHAH Co E E e E e E a PaAaAAH 6 oa ot VODO m 3 Enter the appropriate value 1 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match If this is the O position registration for that color is not required For the illustration B is the appropriate value IGECAI135 79 Mn E MT A AUTH 2 3 5 H ONS HNOWUD 9 27 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Registration gt Detail
241. lowed programs and ports click Change settings What are the risks of allowing a program to communicate Allowed programs and features Name Home Work Private Public O BranchCache Content Retrieval Uses HTTP O BranchCache Hosted Cache Client Uses HTTPS O BranchCache Hosted Cache Server Uses HTTPS O BranchCache Peer Discovery Uses WSD CO Connect to a Network Projector Core Networking m HOOOOO HOOOOO N Se O iSCSI Service CO Media Center Extenders O Netlogon Service OOO Details Remove l Allow another program Select the File and Printer Sharing checkbox Add a port 2 p 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security and Check firewall status EE gt Control Panel Home Y Action Center System and Security Review your computer s status and resolve issues W Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Network and Internet Restore your computer to an earlier time Hardware and Sound Programs al Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall User Accounts and Family Safety gy System Appearance and View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Tec W Allow remote access Seethe name of this computer W Device Manager Clock Language and Region ap Windows Update P A es Tiie ecb me bin ce elnbin mn nn ns n
242. mage when the document processor is used Value Off No correction performed On Low Correction performed The reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using Off On High Select this item if a streak remains after using On Low The reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using On Low Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel Value 1 Darker 2 3 4 Lighter 9 24 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Color Registration Description When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location color drift during printing may occur Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan magenta and yellow to resolve color drift For more information refer to the Color Registration Procedure below Drum Refresh Perform Drum Refresh when images show streaking with white lines Takes about 120 seconds Press Start to perform Drum Refresh NOTE Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done Calibration Adjust color drift or hue of printed image in the most appropriate color Press Start to perform Calibration Press OK after Calibration is complete NOTE Perform Color Registration when the color drift is not adjusted even after performing Calibration and perform Gray Adjust if the color hue is not improved
243. more blue 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Cop Copies 1 ff gt a Paper Zoom a Density Selection e i A40 100 Normal 0 M es a A Mre a Duplex y Combine g Collate L ua 1 sided gt 1 sided Off On Select the function PIU FPAUJUSUTIETIG Average Adjust k l i GB0001_01 GB0047_00 Press lt or gt to make the adjustment gt s Color Balance a Yaw Lal Sharpness 0 Close Use V or AN to scroll up and down Add Edi Shortcut GB0002_01 Copying gt Copying Functions Color Balance Adjust the strength of cyan magenta yellow and black Less Magenta Original More Magenta te FE i m 4 E ie ae a NOTE This feature is used with full color and auto color copying 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 coc 1 i id ee Paper C F Selection xa Hue Adjustment in cee Color Balance Yam a f 3f a f Duplex ap Collate 1 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off On Lal Sharpness Add Edi Shortcut GB0001_01 GB0002_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Select the function ij adi x UCO Z 2GS GB0059_00
244. n gt page 3 39 Add a file name to the job to easily check its status File Name Entry gt page 3 54 Add an E mail subject and body when sending E mail E mail Subject Body page 6 40 Send notice by e mail when a job is complete Job Finish Notice page 3 52 Encrypt your message FTP Encrypted TX gt page 6 41 Send a image to a WSD compatible computer NOTE WSD Scan gt page 6 42 This section does not include fax settings For details on fax operation refer to the FAX Operation Guide Fax functionality can only be used on products equipped with fax capability 6 36 sending gt Sending Functions Sending Size Select size of image to be sent Same as Original Size Automatically sends the same size as the original Metric Select from A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 or Folio Inch Select from Letter Legal Statement Executive or Oficio Il Others Select from 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufukuhagaki Youkei 4 or Youkei 2 Relationship between Original Size Sending Size and Zoom Original Size page 3 35 Sending Size and Zoom page 3 48 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you wish to the same different send as are Original Size Specify as necessary Specify as necessary Sending Size Select Same as Original Select the required size
245. n IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour Default Gateway This indicates the device such as a computer or router that serves as the entrance exit gateway for accessing computers outside the network that you are on When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP that automatically resolves IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned DHCP IPv6 DHCP IPv6 is the next generation of the Internet s Dynamic H
246. n paper 80 g m Colored paper Recycled paper High quality paper 50 sheets Plain paper 105 g m7 37 sheets Thick paper 120 g m7 33 sheets Art paper 1 sheet Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor e Soft originals such as vinyl sheets e Transparencies such as OHP film e Carbon paper e Originals with very slippery surfaces e Originals with adhesive tape or glue e Wet originals e Originals with correction fluid which is not dried e irregularly shaped non rectangular originals e Originals with cut out sections e Crumpled paper e Originals with folds Straighten the folds before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam e Originals bound with clips or staples Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls wrinkles or creases before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam How to Load Originals Q IMPORTANT Before loading originals be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam 1 Adjust the original table size 3 11 Common Operations gt Loading Originals 2 Load Originals Put the side to be scanned or the first side of two sided originals face up Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go NOTE Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals
247. n the removable memory For Group ID specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows If you are using Windows Server 2008 check At tribute Editor tab of user properties If you are using Windows Server 2000 2003 check ADSIEdit ADSIEdit is a support tool in cluded on the installation CD ROM for Windows Server OS under SUPPORT TOOLS FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 33 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Network Authentication Local User List Simple login settings Group Authorization Set gt Group Authorization On 1 1 Lyris hy fse e 9 Se sae a 0 1 1 fo oO a 9 Menu End a el Oo 2 Enter the group information Group ID 10 10 1 4294967295 1234567890 1 2 Group Name GB0458_00 Input 1 Limit 28 GB0057_33 9 52 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Access Level System Menu Counter Administrator User 3 Check the settings 10 10 J GB0459_00 Check the settings and change or add information as needed Group ID System Menu Counter 10 10 Group ID 1234567890 Group Name Group d Access Level Administrator Printer Off l a Group Name System Me
248. n the zoom changes Value Most Suitable Size Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original Same as Original Size Select paper that matches the size of the original regardless the zoom Auto Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected select whether automatic zoom reduce zoom is performed Value Off On DP Read Action Send You can set whether priority is given to speed or image quality when scanning an original on the document processor Value Speed Priority Quality Priority If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately move to the function screen and press the Reset key Configures settings for sending functions Item Description Dest Check before Send When performing sending jobs display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key Value Off On Entry Check for New Dest When adding new destination display the entry check screen to check the entered destination Value Off On Send and Forward Set whether to send the original to another destination and store it when sending images Forward Set the rule to send the original Multiple rules can be selected Value Forward Off On Rule FAX E mail Folder SMB Folder FTP NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Destination Set the destination to use when s
249. n when the list of values cannot be displayed in its entirety on a single screen Displays available functions and settings Color Selection S Full Color GB0002_00 Ae Original Image lt Text Photo Add Edit Registers functions as shortcuts Return to the previous screen 2 Preparation before Use gt Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network and prepare the necessary cables for your environment Connection Example Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable 1000BASE T 100BASE TX or 10BASE T COMMAND CENTER Network settings Scanner default settings User and destination registration Send E mail Sends the image data of scanned Originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E mail message gt 6 18 Network gt ABREEREEEEEERRARA Printing Send SMB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC gt 6 19 Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP gt 6 19 Network Network FAX Network TWAIN Scanning Only on products with the fax function installed WIA Scanning TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software
250. nables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send e mail It is recommended that a Local Area Network LAN be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues To use the transmission function verify the following e Program the settings including the E mail setting on the machine e Use COMMAND CENTER the internal HTML web page to register the IP address the host name of the SMTP server and the recipient e Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys e Create a share folder in the destination computer when a folder SMB FTP is selected as the destination Consult your network administrator concerning destination folder sharing settings Basic Sending Send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment page 6 78 Send to Folder SMB Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC page 6 79 Send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server page 6 79 Image Data Scanning with TWAIN WIA Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program page 6 45 NOTE Different sending options can be specified in combination Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending on page 6 23 This function can only be used on products equipped with fax capability For details about this function refer to the FAX Operation Guide 6 2 Sending gt Basic Operation
251. nal Date Line West accepted 11 00 Samoa gt 1 24 11 00 Universal Coordinated Time 11 e lt Kol a Oo Returns to the original i 10 00 H ii screen without making a Bs Scrolls up and down when the list of values cannot be displayed in its entirety on a single Return to the previous Accepts the settings NOTE In order to change settings that require administer privileges you must log in with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 36 for the default login user name and password 10 10 Login User Name Login Password Keyboard GB0723_00 T Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed 9 2 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu System Menu Settings system Menu include Item Description Reference Page Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures fax cassette and Energy Saver 3 29 settings Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel 9 5 Report Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings 9 5 for printing the result reports can also be configured Counter This counts the number of pages printed or scanned 3 14 User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of 9 7 that information Cassette MP Tray Settings Select paper size
252. name cannot be registered Login Password Enter the password to login up to 16 characters Account Name Add an account where the user belongs The user who registered his her account name can login without entering the account ID Refer to Job Accounting on page 9 57 E mail Address The user can register his her E mail address up to 128 characters The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E mail function Access Level Select Administrator or User for user access privileges My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in Local Authorization Restricts the use of the machine by user Local user authorization must be enabled to use this function see page 9 40 The following restriction items are available Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer Printer Full Color Select whether or not to reject usage of full color print functions for the printer Copy Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions Copy Full Color Select whether or not to reject usage of full color print functions for copies Send Select whether or not to reject usage of send functions other than faxing FAX Transmission Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes Sto
253. nded due to priority override Close Closes the Print Job Status screen NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Send Job Status screen Display Key Status Job Cancel 10 10 0005 pili 0123456 GB0183_00 red ill 1 2 3 4 6 Icons that indicate the job type B Sending Job FAX a Sending Job Folder SMB FTP a Sending Job E mail M Sending Job Application a Sending Job Mixed Multiple 2 Menu Pressing this key displays Priority Override This function allows you to give a particular fax job priority Select the fax job you wish to send immediately and then press Menu followed by Priority Override 3 Cancel Select the job you want to cancel from the list and press this key 4 Press for the job for which you wish to display detailed information 5 Status of job 5 Sending Z Sending Waiting A job for which immediate transmission was specified is waiting for transmission to start H Pausing the job or error Canceling the job E The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals 6 Close NOTE Closes the Send Job Status screen FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status Store Job Status screen Status Job Cancel 10 10 0016 p
254. ng A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time Types of the counts are as follows Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed and the total number of pages used You can also use by Paper Size by Duplex and by Combine to check the number of pages used e For copying you can check the pages used for black and white and full color copying as well as the total pages used For printing you can check the pages used for black and white and full color printing as well as the total pages used You can use by Duplex to check the number of pages used in Duplex 1 sided mode Duplex 2 sided mode and the total for both You can use by Combine to check the number of pages used in Combine None mode Combine 2 in 1 mode Combine 4 in 1 mode and the total for all three Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying faxing and other functions as well as the total number of pages scanned FAX Transmission Pages Displays the number of pages faxed FAX Transmission Time Displays the total duration of fax transmissions FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 59 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 Job Accounting Print Accounting Report Total Job Accounting Each Jo
255. nter ABC Symbol Select the characters that are entered To enter symbols or numbers select Symbol A a a A Press to switch between upper case and lower case Cursor Key Press to move the cursor on the display Input Limit Display Displays maximum number of characters and the number of characters entered Delete Key Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor Space Key Press to insert a space Enter Key Press to enter a line break Cancel Press to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before the entry was made lt Back Press to return to the previous screen OK Next gt Press to save the entered characters and move to the next screen Appendix gt Character Entry Method Upper case Letter Entry Screen AB Input Limit 32 GB0057_E02 Number Symbol Entry Screen E o Input 3 s 123 Limit 32 GB0057_E03 Display Key Description A V To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard press the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to enter Appendix gt Character Entry Method Entering Characters Follow the steps below to enter List A 1 for an example 1 Enter List Space ro ABC raaka Baar a Input Limit 32 a GB0057_E11 GB0057_E12 To shift from lower case to upper
256. nu Counter Group ID 1234567890 10 10 Group Name Group 01 Access Level Administrator Printer Off d Access Level System Menu Counter Group ID Group Name Access Level Printer 1234567890 j Group 01 Administrator Off 1 10 10 9 53 GB0460_00 GB0460_00 GB0460_00 System Menu Counter 1 4294967295 1234567890 2 Input Limit 1 28 10 10 it GB0454_00 System Menu Counter Administrator User 10 10 el Q e Q 1O lt oO a Oo GB0057_63 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Printer Printer Full Color Copy Copy Full Color Send FAX Transmission Storing in Box Storing in Memory System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Group Name Group 01 Reject Usage Access Level Administrator J 1 1 Printer Off Cancel GB0456_00 n GB0460_00 System Menu Counter Printer Full Color Use V or A to scroll up and down Copy Full Color Cancel GB0460_01 Storing in Memory GB0460_02 d Change the restrictions as needed 4 Register the group 10 10 Off Cancel GB0460_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Obtain Network User Property Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDA
257. o the multi purpose tray check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more first remove the left over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray 3 Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray Refer to Quick Setup Wizard on page 3 29 N 3 7 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Envelopes 5 envelope may be loaded in the multi purpose tray Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows Acceptable Envelope Hagaki 148 x 100 mm Oufuku Hagaki 148 x 200 mm Youkei 2 162 x 114 mm Youkei 4 235 x 105 mm Monarch 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm Executive 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 ISO B5 When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray 176 x 250 mm Close the flap Cardstock Return postcard Hagaki Portrait form Landscape form Oufukuhagaki envelopes envelopes Open the flap Load envelope with the print side facing up Common Operations gt Loading Paper 3 9 Common Operations gt
258. ol on the bottom part of the sheet invert it with respect to the top part 11 17 Appendix gt Specifications Specifications Q IMPORTANT Specifications are subject to change without notice Machine Item Description FS C2526MFP FS C2626MFP Type Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser Supported Original Types Sheet Book 3 dimensional objects maximum original size Folio Legal Original Feed System Fixed Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 163 g m Duplex 60 to 163 g m Multi Purpose Tray 60 to 220 g m 230 um Cardstock Paper Type Cassette Plain Rough Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as Simplex Multi Purpose Tray Plain Transparency OHP film Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope Coated High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Paper Size Cassette Maximum 8 1 2 x 14 Legal Duplex 8 1 2 x 14 Legal Minimum 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A6 Duplex 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 A5 Multi Purpose Tray Maximum 8 1 2 x 14 Legal Minimum 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 A6 Zoom Level Manual mode 25 to 400 1 increments Fixed magnifications 400 200 141 129 115 90 86 78 70 64 50 25 Printing Speed A4 26 sheets min Letter 28 sheets min A5 B5 A6 until 15th image 28 sheets min A5 B5 A6 from 16th image 14
259. oll up and down Scan to USB 10 10 4 ag Ga File Format PDF Scan Resolution 300x300dpi all Density L File Name et abf Entry Normal 0 doc s Functions Cancel GB0096_00 3 37 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 2 Select the type of original 2 sided Ready to send 000 to send 10 10 1 sided 2 g Others o L 2 Others 1 10 10 1 sided 2 sided Others l 2 2 Select the type of original Ready to send 10 10 Duplex 1 sided co a el 3 Select the original orientation Ready to send 10 10 Duplex 2 sided Bindina Left Riaht Original Orientation 1 Top Edge on Left 1 1 mn 3 38 GB0013_00 GB0013_00 GB0014_00 GB0014_01 iy 2 sided Binding Left Right fy 2 sided Binding Top Cancel Ready to send 0 4 4 10 10 AL Top Edge on Top EaP Top Edge on Left Cancel OK ie GB0015_00 GB0011_00 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Continuous Scan ony sona fen USB Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job Originals will be scanned continuously until you press Finish Scan 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Continuous Scan Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10
260. olution Image Quality Select the image quality according to the type of original Image Adjustment Density 6 45 Select the exposure Select the Auto button to have the exposure set automatically based on the original Sending gt Scanning using TWAIN Configuration Detail This is used to check current settings and store frequently used settings When the Configuration button is clicked a setting screen opens with buttons for Details Add current configuration and Delete selected configuration Details Current settings can be checked Add current configuration Save current settings with a name and comment Delete selected configuration 3 Place the originals Delete saved settings N 4 Scan the originals For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 1 0 Click the Scan button The document data is scanned 6 46 T Document Box This chapter explains the following topics Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory cccccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseneeesaeeeesaeeeesaaees 7 2 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB cceccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesseeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaaeeeeeneeees 7 5 Removing USB MaMy sssrin ug acme ntenstembeu EAE EE ennnsa aman E E Ea T 1 F uncuons TOF Document BOX sessaaidetenien ainnean eaan Teana a anen a AE aee ER E aanas aN ai e 7 8 PMN serere E E ae E ae nrn E snc
261. on to close the System Properties screen 6 5 sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Checking What to Enter for Login User Name Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows 1 Display the window From the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt The Command Prompt window appears Check the domain name and user name At the Command Prompt enter net config workstation and then press Enter EA Command Prompt C a a Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 76001 Copyright lt c gt 26069 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Users james smith gt net config workstation Computer name N PCOB81 Full Computer name TETS EU Workstation active on NetBT_Tcpip_ XXXXXXXH RRRR RRXK XRRR RARRRRRRRRRR CHARRA RRKRRRR Software version Jindous 7 Ultimate Workstation domain Logon domain COM Open Timeout Csec gt COM Send Count Chyte gt COM Send Timeout lt Cmsec gt gt The command completed successfully C Users james smith gt Screen example user name james smith and domain name ABCDNET sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC Creating a Shared Folder Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer NOTE If there is a workgroup in System Properties configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group 1 From the S
262. ontained in this Agreement No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party By opening this diskette package you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement Preface gt Legal and Safety Information Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with energy saving functionality for automatically transitioning to Sleep to minimize power consumption after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 1 minute have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 27 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function This device includes 2 sided copying as a standard function For example by copying two 1 sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2 sided copy it is possible to lower the amount of paper used For more information refer to Duplex on page 4 7 Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program We have determined as a company participating in ENERGY STAR that this product has earned the ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR Preface gt About this Operation Gu
263. operty 9 7 W Waste Toner Box 2 3 Replacement 10 4 Waste Toner Cover 2 3 WIA 11 25 setting WIA Driver 2 20 WSD Print Setup 9 21 WSD Scan 6 42 Setup 9 21 X XPS Fit to Page 7 12 Z Zoom Copy 4 5 Send Store 3 48 Index 5 Index 6 QUALITY CERTIFICATE This machine has passed all quality controls and final inspection PASSIONATE PEOPLE FROM ALL OVER THE WORLD KYOCERA MITA EUROPE B V EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 www kyoceramita europe com KYOCERA MITA Europe B V Amsterdam NL Zweigniederlassung Zurich Hohlstrasse 614 CH 8048 Zurich Phone 41 1 908 49 49 Fax 41 1 908 49 50 www kyoceramita ch KYOCERA MITA SALES COMPANIES IN EMEA KYOCERA MITA INTERNATIONAL SALES Europe Middle East amp North Africa Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 www kyoceramita europe com AUSTRIA KYOCERA MITA AUSTRIA GmbH Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95 A 1230 Wien Phone 43 1 86 338 0 Fax 43 1 86 338 400 www kyoceramita at BELGIUM S A KYOCERA MITA Belgium N V Sint Martinusweg 199 201 BE 1930 Zaventem Phone 32 2 720 9270 Fax 32 2 720 8748 www kyoceramita be DENMARK KYOCERA MITA Denmark A S Ejby Industrivej 60 DK 2600 Glostrup Phone 45 70 22 3880 Fax 45 45 76 3850 www kyoceramita dk FINLAND KYOCERA MITA Finland OY Kir
264. option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu Restart Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine Same as the computer restart RAM Disk Setting A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box Optional Memory When optional memory is installed select the memory allocation scheme based on the application in which you are using the equipment Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Date Timer Configures settings related to the date and time Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Language Description Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Value English Deutsch Fran ais Espanol Italiano Nederlands Pyccxunu Portugu s Report Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured Report Print Item Description Status Page Prints the status page allowing you to check the information including current settings and optional equipment installed Status Page MFP Firmware Version Font List Prints the font list allowing y
265. oring in the box 9 71 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Unknown Login User Name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID i e unsent IDs If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down 7 lt gt System Menu Counter on Gp Adatess Book One Touch 2 E ter toomaov accourano O O E ter toomaov accourano O O Accounting E Printer System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Settings sl Job Accounting Settings 3 Unknown ID Job Reject 1 GB0054_03 1 1 GB0434_00 2 Select the function 10 10 Permit GB0491_00 a d 9 72 10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains the following topics Toner Container Replacement sccsncsecesaolevsaediualwivaceasestedeecaseriecesedentwsdendenestacessuceeda deed actsensace eae a i ad iaaii Se 10 2 Waste Toner Box Replacement cccccccccsseceeccceeecueecaneceueceucecueecsuecaeesseesueesueesaueeeaeesaeecsuesausesaeesseesgesaeeegas 10 4 Gean e E E E ER 10 6 AS Se e EN EE EEE A E tsar E A E E A EE E T E E E E EE E A 10 6 DO Um POCO SOT oepa E EA E E E EE EEE E 10 6 eee EE E E E E EA OAT A A A A E E A E E E T 10 7 SOLVING MANUNCIOS sessist n E E e E E E E E 10 8 Responding to Error Messages ccccscccceececsececce
266. ost Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6 It extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the 11 22 Appendix gt Glossary network DHCP IPv6 permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6 node Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation dpi dots per inch A unit for resolution representing the number of dots printed per inch 25 4 mm EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal Enhanced WSD Kyocera s proprietary web services Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers page description languages The machine emulates operation of PCL6 KPDL and KPDL automatic FTP File Transfer Protocol A protocol to transfer files on the TCP IP network whether the Internet or an intranet Along with HTTP and SMTP POP FTP is now frequently used on the Internet Grayscale A computer color expression Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest without any other colors Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels that is white and black only for
267. ou to check the font samples installed in the machine Selection FSET EEEEEHI PT Bal EERRRRERERREE EEEHEHI EEEHEHI BEHI EENEEEEEEEENI EEEEEEEE PET Baal EERRRRRRRREEE EEHEHE EEEHEHI EENREENENEEENI ALLELE EEEEEHI ALLLELEELELILO EEEEHI EEEEEHI HERRRERRRREEE BERRERRRE EEEEEHI EENEEEEEEEENIE EEHEEEHI EEHEEHI BERGER RRREEE BERRREREEI BERREEE EERERERREREEE EEEE PE BERRGEEI EEEEEHI EEEEEEH EEEHEHI Network Status Prints the network status allowing you to check the information including network address and protocol Network Status Page MFP Firmware Version Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Service Status Description Prints the service status More detailed information is available than on the Status Page Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose Accounting Report Result Report Settings Send Result Report Prints the accounting report allowing you to check the accounts that have been registered on the machine ACCOUNT REPORT MFP Firmware Version NOTE You can print the accounting report by logging in with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 36 for the default login user name and password Description Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete E mail Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when E mail or SMB FTP transmission is compl
268. ount by Paper Size and then Black amp White allows you to check the number of pages by paper size Scanned Pages GB0589_00 Common Operations gt Login Logout Login Logout If user login administration is enabled it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine Refer to Adding a User on page 9 36 for the default login user name and password N NOTE You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password In this event login with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password Login Normal login 4 Enter the login user name 10 10 Input Limit64 Login User Name E rd Login Password Keyboa rd If this screen is displayed during operations press Keyboard to enter the login user name The name can also be entered using the numeric keypad GB0723_00 GB0057_00 T Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters N 2 Enter the login password 2600 Input 4 Input 4 Limit 4 Limit 4 v ABC a A q w e r t y u fe p a S d f g h j k Z Xx Cc v b 4 m Press Password to enter the login password GB0057_00 GB0057_01 Common Operations gt Login Logout 3 Log in 10 10 Login User Name 2600 Keyboard Login Password KK Keyboard NOTE If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method either Local or Network can
269. ounter 10 10 User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password FORK Account Name Others Cancel GB0441_00 To delete System Menu Counter 2 Admin Admin A F a DeviceAdmin 2600 2 User A User A e o g e a oO el Select the user you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon NOTE Also you can delete the user by selecting the user press Menu and then Delete 9 44 GB0839_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Simple Login The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name Users must be registered in advance to use this functionality For details refer to Adding a User on page 9 36 X Simple Login Settings Enable simple login 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 33 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Local Authentication Local User List Simple login settings gt Local User Authorization 1 1 Off GB0435_00 2 Enable simple login 10 10 10 10 Simple Login off Off Simple Login Setup a t GB0711_00 GB0710_00 Register a User Register users to use simple login Up to 20 users can be registered The table below explains the user information to be registered Name Set the user name to display on the Simple Login screen User
270. ountries For FAX TEL Switch this change is possible with some countries 1 Display the screen 10 10 System Menu Counter j 1 5 E Counter lt GB0054_00 2 Select a function System Menu Counter 10 10 FAX Setup Paper Setup Energy Saver Setup GB0840_00 3 29 Common Operations gt Quick Setup Wizard 3 Configure the function 10 10 Starting Setup This wizard will help you set the basic settings to use the fax GB0841_00 el Start the wizard Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings 10 10 1 Dialing RX Mode NOTE If you experience difficulty configuring the settings refer to Help Screen on page 3 31 End el Set the dialing and reception mode GB0842_00 Exits the wizard Settings configured so far are applied lt lt Previous Returns to the previous item Skip gt gt Advances to the next item without setting the current item Next gt Advances to the next screen lt Back Returns to the previous screen Finish Register the settings and exit the wizard 3 30 Common Operations gt Help Screen Help Screen If you have difficulty operating the machine you can check how to operate it using the touch panel When the help is displayed on the touch panel you can press it to display the Help screen How to read the screen Help titles Displays
271. owing settings GB0889_00 Date Time settings Time Zone Summer Time Date Time Network settings Obtain IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway O For details about settings refer to the help information displayed on the touch panel To make N changes after this initial configuration refer to Date Timer on page 9 23 and System on page 9 78 2 22 Preparation before Use gt COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail COMMAND CENTER Settings for E mail COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security network printing E mail transmission and advanced networking NOTE Here information on the FAX settings has been omitted For more information on using the FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed 1 Display the screen 1 Launch your Web browser 2 Inthe Address or Location bar enter the machine s IP address E g http 192 168 48 21 The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as well as their current status 2 Configure the function Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen The values for each category must be set separately If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER enter a password to access pages other than the startup page The
272. plex Combine gp Collate ey Sa a 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off On Functions k Favorites GB0001_04 3 28 Common Operations gt Quick Setup Wizard Quick Setup Wizard Make the following basic settings as instructed by the Wizard Paper Setup Sets the paper size and media type for the cassettes and the multi purpose tray 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Paper Size Cassette 1 Media Type 2 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Paper Size Cassette 2 Media Type 3 Cassette 3 Cassette 3 Paper Size Cassette 3 Media Type 4 MP Tray MP Tray Paper Size MP Tray Media Type Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode 1 Sleep Mode Sleep Mode Sleep Timer FAX Setup Configures basic fax settings 1 Dialing RX Mode Dialing RX Mode Dialing Mode Dialing RX Mode Reception Mode Dialing RX Mode Auto DRD 2 Local FAX Info Local FAX Info Local FAX Name Local FAX Info Local FAX Number Local FAX Info Local FAX ID Local FAX Info Print Position 3 Sound Volume Speaker Volume Monitor Volume 4 Rings Normal Answering Machine FAX TEL Switch 5 Redial Redial Retry Times This function is displayed when the size dial on the cassette is set to Other This function is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed Only on products with the fax function installed Auto DRD is available for some c
273. quipment to the computers The TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software TWAIN is adopted on a large amount of graphic software e g Adobe Photoshop and OCR software USB Universal Serial Bus 2 0 A USB interface standard for Hi Speed USB 2 0 The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps This machine is equipped with USB 2 0 for high speed data transfer WIA Windows Imaging Acquisition A function to import images supported after Windows Me XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices This function replaces what TWAIN used to do the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application 11 25 Appendix gt Glossary 11 26 Index A Address Book Adding a Contact 6 24 Adding a Group 6 28 Editing and Deleting 6 31 Adjustment Maintenance Auto Color Correction 9 24 Background Density Adj 9 24 Calibration 9 25 Color Registration 9 25 Correcting Black Line 9 24 Density Adjustment 9 24 Display Brightness 9 24 Drum Refresh 9 25 Toner Save Level EcoPrint 9 24 AppleTalk 11 22 Setup 9 21 Application 9 15 Auto Form Feed Timeout 11 22 Auto IP 11 22 Setup 9 18 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function 1 12 Auto Paper Selection 11 22 Auto Sleep 2 21 11 22 B Background Density Adjust 3 47 Bonjour 11 22 Setup 9 18 C Card Authentication Kit 11 4 Cassette Loading Paper
274. r Authorization Off GB0435_00 2 Select On 10 10 off booo O 1 1 e GB0908_00 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration My Panel Registers settings for individual users Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in Set when Adding a User see page 9 36 or Editing and Deleting Users see page 9 42 Environments in which shortcut can be configured Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel Default Screen Set the screen appearing right after the user logs in default screen Shortcut Select either Shared Shortcut or Private Shortcut Language 10 10 10 10 Language English Default Screen Shortcut Shared Shortcut Cancel GB0749_00 GB0744_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Default Screen 10 10 Language English f Default Screen Copy 1 1 Shortcut Shared Shortcut Document Box Cancel GB0749_00 GB0745_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down When Send or FAX has been selected sets which screen to use as the default screen 10 10 Destination Address Book 3 1 1 Ext Address Book One Touch Q l Cancel lt Back a 0 Shortcut System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 Shared Shortcut Cc Private Shortcut Language English Default Screen Copy Shortcut Shared Shortcut zw 1 1
275. r of copies to print as desired When using the number of copies specified with print job select GB0003_00 Upon completion of printing the Private Print job is automatically deleted To delete Document Box 10 10 _ Sjdoc 0100908134821 aw 1 1 r GB0653_01 Select the document you wish to delete and press Delete the trash can icon NOTE The password entry screen will be displayed Enter the password using the numeric keys 5 7 Printing gt Printing Data Saved on the Printer Proof and Hold Proof and Hold stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Proof and Hold Print job Refer to the Printer Driver Operation Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver NOTE RAM disk mode must be enabled For details refer to RAM Disk Setting on page 9 23 Y Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the RAM disk you can set the maximum number of stored jobs 1 Display the screen 10 10 lt gt System Menu Counter ee Send gt E System Menu Counter 10 10 X Favorites l n E 1 1 DE Box System Menu Counter A Copy Job Retention A Deletion of Job Retention 1 i Sub Address Box GB0054_02 14 10 10 GB0290_00 GB0310_00 2 Enter the maximum number of stored jobs 10 10 e S k se io m oO T You can enter any number between 0
276. r of pages used for copying and printing Printer Count Total number of pages used for full color copying and printing Total number of pages used for black and white copying and printing When Individual is selected for Copier Total number of pages used for copying Printer Count Total number of pages used for full color copying Total number of pages used for black and white copying Total number of pages used for printing Total number of pages used for full color printing Total number of pages used for black and white printing Shared statistics Total number of pages scanned Total number of pages scanned for copying Total number of pages faxed Total number of other pages scanned Total number of pages received Total number of pages sent Total duration of fax transmissions Total number of duplex pages printed Total number of 1 sided pages printed Total number of combine 2 in 1 pages Total number of combine 4 in 1 pages Total number of non combine pages printed 1 Prepare paper Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette 2 Display the screen Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 59 display the screen 3 Print reports 10 10 Job Accounting Print Accounting Report 1 2 lotal Job Accounting Each Job Accounting GB0461_02 9 70 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting Job Accounting
277. ra aasa O File Action View Help e9 2AB Windows Firewall with Advance E3 Inbound Rules E3 Outbound Rules Bu Connection Security Rules Lol Inbound Rules E Name Group Profile Enabled Action BranchCache Content Retrieval HTTP In BranchCache Content Retr All Allow connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Domain Allow No b Monitoring BranchCache Hosted Cache Server HTT BranchCache Hosted Cach All No Allow riter by Prone gt BranchCache Peer Discovery WSD In BranchCache Peer Discove All No Allow Connect to a Network Projector TCP In Connect to a Network Proje Private No Allow Y ea J connect to a Network Projector TCP In Connect to a Network Proje Domain No Allow Y Filter by Group gt connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Private No Allow View gt No No IG Refresh connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Private Allow a i connect to a Network Projector WSD Ev Connect to a Network Proje Domain No Allow i Export List connect to a Network Projector WSD In Connect to a Network Proje All No Allow Help Ocore Networking Destination Unreacha Core Networking All Yes Allow B revinondtaeWiw O O Rule Type Select the type of firewall rule to create Rule Type What type of
278. re Letter Legal Executive Statement Oficio Il A4 A5 BS and Folio 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 4 2 display the screen Copying gt Copying Functions Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies 1 hi Paper R Zoom il Density Selection e A40 100 Normal 0 a ire Z Duplex _ D Collate XQ 4 p 1 sided gt gt 1 sided On Functions w Favorites GB0001_01 2 Select the function 1 sided gt gt 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided or 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 1 sided gt gt 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided o 9 2 sided gt gt 2 sided gt er Others GB0009_00 Others 1 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 1 sided gt gt 1 sided 1 cided gt gt 7 cided 2 sided gt gt 1 sided g ey gt 2 sided gt gt 2 sided Others 2 Select the desired Duplex option Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 10 10 Duplex 2 4 i 1 sided gt gt 1 sided paeen w 1 sided gt gt 2 sided GB0009_00 1 1 p 2 sided gt gt 1 sided un 2 sided gt gt 2 sided g If you choose a 2 sided sheet proceed to Step 3 If you choose duplex proceed to Step 4 GB0010_00 GB0024_00 3 Select the binding edge of the originals Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 10 10
279. resents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission TWAIN Technology Without Any Interested Name A technical specification for connecting scanners digital cameras and other image e
280. ress Continue to print the scanned pages The print job cannot be processed completely Press Cancel to cancel the job The process cannot be performed due to insufficient memory If only End is available press End The job will be canceled When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses P Error Message Paper jam Checkpoints Corrective Actions If a paper jam occurs the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper Reference Page Print overrun 10 16 Warning Low printer memory The job was paused Re starting the job Press Continue Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages R Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page RAM disk error An error has occurred on the RAM disk 9 23 Job is canceled Press End The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded Restart the system or turn the power OFF ON If the error still occurs divide the file into smaller files 04 Insufficient space on the RAM disk Increase the RAM disk size by changing RAM Disk Setting in the system menu NOTE The range of RAM disk size can be increased by selecting Printer Priority
281. ress Box refer to the Fax Operation Guide FAX Configures settings for fax functions Refer to the Fax Operation Guide Favorites Application You can install and use applications that will make your day to day use 9 15 of this machine more efficient Internet This procedure sets up the Internet browser application 9 15 Address Book One Touch Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings For details on Address Book refer to Registering Destinations in the Address Book on page 6 24 and for details on One Touch Key refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 6 33 9 3 Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu User Login Job Accounting Description Configures settings related to machine management For details on User Login refer to User Login Administration on page 9 32 and for details on Job Accounting refer to Job Accounting on page 9 57 Reference Page Printer Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application software screen However the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine System Configures machine system settings Network Configures network settings Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB host or optional interfaces Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu
282. ring in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory Mandatory at user registration NOTE By default one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored Each user s properties are Machine Administrator e User Name DeviceAdmin e Login User Name 2600 e Login Password 2600 e Access Level Machine Administrator Administrator e User Name Admin e Login User Name Admin e Login Password Admin e Access Level Administrator It is recommended to periodically change the user name login user name and login password regularly for your security 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to User Login Settings on page 9 33 display the screen 9 36 System Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Lacal Authenticatian Local User List Simple login settings Local User Authorization GB0435_00 Enter the user information User Name Input Limit 32 GBO0057_51 Input Lirnit 64 GB0057_53 Access Level 10 10 Administrator gt ee 1 1 GB0445_00 A Select the user access privilege Check the settings setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration System Menu Counter 2 DeviceAdmin 2600 caw f 1 1 el Check the settings and change or add information as needed User Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 User Name U
283. rule would you like to create Protocol and Ports j Program Action Prof Ruile that cantmils cannections far a nmaram Name BranchCache Content Retrieval Uses HTTP Rule that controls connections for a Windows experience Custom Custom rule 6 12 Sending gt Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 6 r New Inbound Rule Wizard Protocol and Ports Specify the protocols and ports to which this rule applies Steps Rule Type Does this rule apply to TCP or UDP Protocol and Ports 1 Action ar Profile Name Does this rule apply to all local ports or specific local ports Specific local ports 139 Example 80 443 5000 5010 Leam more about protocol and ports 3 Select Specific local ports and enter 139 7 amp New Inbound Rule Wizard Action Specify the action to be taken when a connection matches the conditions specified in the rule Steps Rule Type What action should be taken when a connection matches the specified conditions Protocol and Ports Allow the connection Action This includes connections that are protected with IPsec as well as those are not Profile WO Allow the connection n it 1s secure Name This includes only connections that have been authenticated by using IPsec Connections will be secured using the settings in IPsec properties and rules in the Connection Security Rule node D
284. s 1 Press the Power key Main Power indicator Check that the indicators are off Verify that the Power key light has gone out and that the Main Power indicator is lit up 2 Turn the main power switch off s NOTE When the Processing indicator or Memory indicator is lit up the machine is operating Turning off the main power switch while the machine is operating may cause it to malfunction In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time A CAUTION If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the main power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If using the products equipped with the fax function note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception Q IMPORTANT Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity 2 14 Preparation before Use gt Installing Software Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library DVD Product Library if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC NOTE Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges Plug and Play is disabled on this dev
285. s use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine If transparencies jam frequently at output try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected 11 14 Appendix gt Paper Label Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray or paper feeder multi purpose For selecting labels use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure When printing onto labels you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble Top sheet Carrier sheet Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used This composition of labels may cause more problems The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels resulting in a serious failure Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet When using such paper do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output Allowed Not allowed Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications Top sheet
286. s and how to delete favorites 1 Display the screen Favorites Select the function 10 10 ID Card Copy Paper Saving Copy Scan to PC Addre Application eo ea ae HY ss Book 2 Edit or delete a favorite To edit a favorite 1 Select the favorite you wish to edit _ Se 10 10 2 Edit the favorite Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending Number 01 Owner Admin l E Name 10 10 1 2 Number E 10 10 Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending o 3 21 GB0781_00 GB0781_00 GB0779_00 Scan to E mail A ss Entry j a S a S a S Scan to PC Addre Scan to E mail A ddress Book GB0056_00 10 10 01 Sending Job E mail 15 ID Card Copy Sending Job E mail 1 2 16 G Paper Saving Copy 17 jae Scan to PC Address Entry wD DTA Cancel Next gt l Input 20 Limit 32 GB0760_01 GB0057_82 GB0780_00 Common Operations gt Favorites Permission SSS 10 10 A Destination Address Book 1 Function Type Wizard e Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they are shared with other users GB0781_02 GB0305_00 3 Register the favorite aa SS 10 10 Name Sending Job E mail Job Type Multi Sending Number GBO0781_00 To delete a 10 10 10 10 01 Sending Job E mail Edit 1 1 ID Card Copy
287. seeesseeesuseseeeeseeeenaass 8 10 Manual Log History Transmission sige psanncosues ina sounc Svanevewedendwe sacs cannceous pniwacdead saseavana sabuevaeadinwaelanedveancemiada 8 10 Sewing E Mail SUD SCU scese eanan raina ea aa Te aaa a eiaa EN aN e 8 11 CHECK Ol DC VICS SAS e E E E E tenn 8 12 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper cccsececseeeceeeeeeeeeceeeecaeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeesenees 8 14 8 1 Status Job Cancel gt Checking Job Status E Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs and Scheduled Jobs The following job statuses are available Print Job Status Copy E mail reception Printer Job Report List Printing from Document Box Printing data from removable memory FAX reception Application Send Job Status FAX transmission Application Folder SMB FTP transmission Mixed Multiple destination E mail Store Job Status Scan Printer FAX Scheduled Job Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission NOTE FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed 1 Display the screen 10 10 Status eves Job Status 2 Job Cancel J ie Job Status fso Job Status fire Job PrintJobs Press either of Print
288. ser A Login User Name User Aq Login Password Ea A A A Account Name Others d GB0446_00 9 37 User Al Input6 Limit 32 ae N eh EEE EET Tel _ ___ GB0440_00 GB0057_26 setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Login User Name Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Input Limit 64 User Name User A Login User Name User A Login Password P Account Name Others l Ca Login Password GB0446_00 GB0057_28 Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Inputs Limit64 User Name Login User Name User a 1 2 Login Password FOC Account Name Others e Enter the same login password twice for confirmation purposes GB0446_00 GB0057_29 Accounting Name Searches by account name System Menu Counter 10 10 i Q J User Name User A 2 fi Others Login User Name User A Select the item that you want to change 10 10 Login Password Pii Account Name Others Cancel GB0446_00 GB0603_00 Allows you to search for an account name and sorts results Displays details for individual account names E mail Address 10 10 Input 11 7 Limit 128 E mail Address AN Access Level User My Panel Local Authorization j d Access Level System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter 10 10 E mail Address 1 My Panel GB0446_01 GB00
289. sissauga Ontario L5T 1S8 07004 0008 USA Canada 1 Preface gt Notice Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning It may be prohibited to copy scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner Copying Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low It may not be limited to these items Do not knowingly copy scan the items that are not to be copied scanned Paper money Bank note Securities Stamp Passport Certificate Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying scanning of other items not mentioned above 1 8 Preface gt Legal and Safety Information Legal and Safety Information Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited Regarding Trade Names e PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation e KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation e Microsoft MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and or other countries e PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company e Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation e Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc e IBM and IBM PC AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation e Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U
290. ss 6 18 Entry Check for New Dest 9 14 Multi Sending 6 23 Specifying a New PC Folder 6 19 Index 1 Device Status 8 12 FAX 8 13 Printer 8 13 Removable Memory 8 13 Scanner 8 12 DHCP 11 22 Setup 9 18 DHCP IPv6 11 22 Setup 9 19 Document Processor 2 2 Document Processor Cover 2 5 Document Processor Open Close Handle 2 5 dpi 11 23 Duplex 3 37 4 7 Duplex Unit 2 3 E EcoPrint 11 23 Copy 4 13 Printer 9 16 E mail Subject Body 6 40 Emulation 11 23 selection 9 16 Encrypted PDF Password 7 10 Energy Saving Control Function 1 12 Energy Star Program 1 12 Enhanced WSD 9 21 11 23 Envelopes 11 16 Environment 1 3 Error Handling 9 13 Error Messages 10 13 Expansion Memory 11 3 F Favorites 3 17 Editing and Deleting 3 21 Registering 3 17 Using 3 23 Favorites Application Application 9 15 Default Screen 9 15 File Format 3 49 File Name Entry 3 54 File Separation 6 39 First Print Time 11 19 FTP 11 23 FTP Client Transmission Protocol Detail 9 20 FTP Encrypted TX 6 41 FTP Server Reception Protocol Detail 9 20 Fuser Cover 2 3 G Glossary 11 22 GPL LGPL 1 9 Grayscale 3 51 11 23 H Hagaki 11 16 Handholds 2 5 Help 11 23 Help Screen 3 31 Host Name 9 18 HTTP Protocol Detail 9 20 HTTPS Protocol Detail 9 20 HTTP Security 9 22 Hue Adjustment 4 14 Inner Tray 2 2 Interface Block 9 22 Internet Proxy 9 15 IP Address 11 23 Setup 9 18 IPP Protocol Detail 9 20 IPP over SSL Protocol Detail 9 20 IPP S
291. stem Menu Counter 10 10 User Login Network Authentication Local User List Simple login settings Group Authorization Off Group List 2 Group Authorization Set V GB0435_03 GB0450_00 Use V or A to scroll up and down 2 Select On 10 10 Off 1 1 Sa GB0451_00 Add a Group Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage Up to 20 groups can be individually registered Other users and groups belong to Others Group ID Enter the ID displayed on the group list between 1 and 4294967295 Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list up to 32 characters Access Level Select Administrator or User for group access privileges Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer Printer Full Color Select whether or not to reject usage of full color print functions for the printer Copy Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions Copy Full Color Select whether or not to reject usage of full color print functions for copies Send Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions FAX Transmission Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions 9 51 Setup Registration and User Management gt User Login Administration Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes Storing in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing i
292. sure that it is not curled or folded Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator see the figure When loading the paper keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper If there is a gap readjust the guides to fit the paper 3 4 Common Operations gt Loading Paper There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front of the cassette to indicate the remaining paper supply When paper is exhausted the pointer will go down to the level of empty Q IMPORTANT When pulling out the cassette from the machine confirm there is no paper left in the machine Be sure that the paper is properly set in the cassette NOTE To use the paper stopper open as shown below Example Legal If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 3 5 Common Operations gt Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 50 sheets of Legal or smaller plain paper 80 g m7 The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A4 to A6
293. t 1 0123456 __ 001 Sales department 1 abc am 1 1 2 Y 002 B Support department 0234567 w _ 002 IG E Support department B r 21x V GB0428_01 Eo Cancel rer 8 Register the group 10 10 Name Support department Address Number Auto Member Member 2 Cancel GB0420_03 ber ait lize Sales department 1 0123456 ce 5 Support department 0234567 om 1 1 GB0114_04 Bae i lj Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries Edit and delete the destinations contacts you added to the Address Book 1 Display the screen i 10 10 e n wl Dest Q j S d 2 Recall Check e B e o gt One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book 3 ee EE y i i gt oul a Ready to send 001 123456 __ 001 G 123456 __ 001 5 123456 A 3 EC ae G 2 Edit or delete the destination To edit the destination Address Book All 019 A Sales department 1 002 A Support department 001 SYSTEM DEP 003 y Sales department 1 Menu GB0396_01 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the destination contacts or group to edit Address Book All IYK B 001 123456 123456 Ga 123 456789 co G 10 10 1 1 12345 com ua 11111 com c GB0426_01 10 10 Member 2 Cancel Next gt GB0785_00 You can specify a destinat
294. t MS qual Cetaley Oo Talc Optional Function gt lt gt System Menu Counter 10 10 GB0054_04 GB0511_01 2 Start using an application 1 Select the desired application and press Activate 10 10 CARD AUTHENTICA GB0557_00 a Displays details for individual applications Appendix gt Optional Equipment 2 Select Official and enter the license key using the numeric keys 10 10 10 10 Official 1 1 2 l d 4 i it e GB0608_00 GB0609_00 el Some applications do not require you to enter a license key To use the application as a trial select Trial Q IMPORTANT If you change the date time while using an application you will no longer be able to use the application Appendix gt Character Entry Method Character Entry Method To enter characters for a name use the on display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below NOTE QWERTY QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard Press the System Menu Counter key Common Settings and then Keyboard Layout to choose desired layout QWERTY layout is used here as an example You may use another layout following the same steps Entry Screens Lower case Letter Entry Screen Abc GBO0057_E01 Display 5 6 7 Inputs Limit32 11 12 Description Displays entered characters Keyboard Press the character to e
295. t amount of time elapses E Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Error occurred at cassette Remove the indicated cassette Press Next gt to follow the instructions Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Failed to specify Job Failed to specify Job Accounting when Accounting processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End Failed to store job retention data The job is canceled Press End When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses 10 14 Troubleshooting gt Responding to Error Messages H Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page High temperature Adjust room Adjust the temperature and the humidity 1 3 temp of your room Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Incorrect account ID The account ID was incorrect when processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End Incorrect Login User Name or The login user name or password was Password incorrect when processing the job externally The job is canceled Press End Inner tray is full of paper Remove paper from the inner tray and press Continue When Auto Error Clear is set to On processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses Error Message C
296. t items E mail Up to 100 Folders SMP FTP Total of 5 SMB and FTP FAX Up to 100 Also depending on the settings you can send and print at the same time Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types Continue to enter E mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time NOTE If the destinations include a fax the images sent to all destinations will be black and white 6 23 Sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Registering Destinations in the Address Book Add a new destination to the Address Book There are two registering methods contacts and groups When adding a group enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book Adding a Contact A maximum of 200 contact addresses can be registered Each address can include the information such as destination name E mail address FTP server folder path computer folder path and FAX No Only on products with the fax function installed NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Contact addresses can also be registered in the system menu 1 Display the screen 10 10 Dest 0 i l Check S n 2 Recall G mi One Touch Key Ext Address Book N N 1 2 E mail a Ready to send 1
297. t to a PC Checking the Path Check the share name of the shared folder that will be the destination for the document 1 Display the window 1 Enter pc001 in Program and File Search in the Start menu 2 pc001 scannerdata In Windows XP click Search in the Start menu select All files and folders and search for the destination computer to which the file will be sent In Search Companion click Computers or people and then A computer on the network In the Computer name text box enter the name of the computer that you checked pc001 and then click Search 2 Click pc001 scannerdata that appears in the search results In Windows XP double click the computer pc001 that appears in the search results 2 Check the folder that appears Organize Include in library Share with i Mow tnldos my A ir Favorites Name Date modified Type Dekiop Ji projectA 3 22 2010 10 37 AM File folder J Downloads J projectB 3 22 2010 10 38 AM File folder E Recent Places Check the address bar The third and following text strings should be entered for the path In Windows XP double click the scannerdata folder and check the address bar The text string to the right of the third backslash should be entered in Path Example scannerdata NOTE You can also specify a subfolder in the shared folder as the location where data is to be sent In this case share name name of folder in the shared folder shou
298. t weight for each media type For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed For details refer to Media Type Setting on page 9 117 Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1 3 and multi purpose tray Value Cassette 1 to 3 Multi Purpose Tray Paper Selection Set the default paper selection Value Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals Default Paper Source Select paper source set by Default Paper Source Media for Auto Color Media for Auto B amp W Select a default media type for auto paper selection when Auto is selected of Paper Selection If Plain is selected the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected Select All Media Types for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size Value All Media Types Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick Coated High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead punch holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions In such a case select Adjust Print Direction to adjust the print direction When paper orientation is not important select Speed Priority Example
299. tails on FAX refer to FAX Operation Guide N E mail Address Limit 128 Input 11 W 1 oO N LO oO a Enter the E mail address Up to 128 characters can be entered 6 25 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters The Folder SMB Address 1 Enter Host Name Path Port Login User Name and Login Password Ready to send 10 10 Input 3 pr i 2 Limit 64 Host Name Login User Name Cancel GB0705_02 GB0057_15 Use V or AN to scroll up and down For more information refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6 79 2 Confirm the connection status Ready to send 10 10 ae 10 10 Host Name 2 Connection Test Path Port Login User Name 1 GB0705_03 GB0696_00 Connected appears when connection to the destination is correctly established If Cannot connect appears review the entry Ready to send 10 10 Host Name Path Port Login User Name Cancel GB0705_03 The Folder FTP Address 1 Enter Host Name Path Port Login User Name and Login Password 10 10 Input 3 Limit 64 Host Name Login User Name Cancel 1O FS N Ke O a GB0709_02 Use V or AN to scroll up and down For more information refer to Specifying a New PC Folder on page 6 79 N 6 26 sending gt Re
300. tart menu select Control Panel Appearance and Personalization and then Folder Options Ease oT Access Center a Accommodate low vision Use screen reader Turn on easy access keys Turn High Contrast on or off mck to open Show hidden files and folders Fonts N Preview delete or show and hide fonts Change Font Settings Adjust ClearType text k NVIDIA Control Panel Windows XP click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools Folder Options s Sen f Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Icons that you are using for this folder to all folders of this type Advanced settings Launch folder windows in a separate process Restore previous folder windows at logon V Show drive letters V Show encrypted or compressed NTFS files in color Show pop up description for folder and desktop items V Show preview handlers in preview pane 2 Use Sharing Wizard Recommended Automatically type into the Search Box Select the typed item in the view Restore Defauts _ 3 Ges Remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard Recommended in Advanced settings In Windows XP click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing Recommended in Advanced settings 4 Create a folder 1 Create a folder on the local disk C For example create a folder with the name scannerdata on the local disk C 2 Right cl
301. tcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down Scan to USB 10 10 iT ge a o E File Duplex Scan T Format L Resolution PDF T sided 300x300dpi e 1s wes ers all Density Le File Name amg abnt Normal 0 Functions GB0096_00 Cancel Input 3 ET 1 Limit32 elzi x elviojn m Up to 32 characters can be entered GB0057_06 Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters X 3 Add other information Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 None Use V or AN to scroll up and down Date and Time Job No Job No amp Date and Time GB0068_00 Cancel lt Back 3 54 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Priority Override Suspend the current job and give a new job top priority The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished NOTE This function is not available if current job was an override Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage 4 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen 2 Press Functions and then Priority Override Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies rE Oo en 1 Paper A Zoom Density Selection aes A40 100 Normal 0 a a fr _ Duplex 3 Combine g Collate 1 sided Off On 2 Select the function Read
302. ted TX page 6 47 FAX Delayed Transmission refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Direct Transmission refer to Fax Operation Guide FAX Polling RX refer to Fax Operation Guide Add Edit Shortcut page 3 25 XI Document Job Box page 5 6 Box 2 Removable Menu Store File File Format page 3 49 Memory T Duplex page 3 37 Scan Resolution page 3 44 Density page 3 43 File Name Entry page 3 54 Functions Original Size page 3 35 Original Orientation page 3 36 Storing Size page 7 13 Color Selection page 3 51 Original Image page 3 45 Sharpness page 3 46 Background Density Adj page 3 47 Zoom page 3 48 Continuous Scan page 3 39 Job Finish Notice page 3 52 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 25 Print Copies page 7 3 Paper Selection page 3 41 Collate page 3 42 Duplex page 7 9 Functions Color Selection page 3 51 Job Finish Notice page 3 52 Priority Override page 3 55 Encrypted PDF Password page 7 10 JPEG TIFF Print page 7 11 XPS Fit to Page page 7 12 Add Edit Shortcut page 3 25 Sub Address Box refer to Fax Operation Guide Polling Box refer to Fax Operation Guide xii Status Print Job Status page 8 3 Job gt Send Job Status page 8 4 Store Job Status page 8 5 Scheduled Job page 8 6
303. tetaar 6 2 Preparation for Sending a DOCUMENT to a PC oo ceccc cece cece a eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeae esse eeeseesseeeseeeseeeseeeesaeesaeeeaeeeses 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Host Name cccccccccseccseeeceeeceecceeeceesaueecaeeseesaueeceeesaeesseessneesseesaaes 6 5 Checking What to Enter for Login User Name ccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeeeeesaeesaeeseeeeaaes 6 6 Creating a MO IOUT serseri aein in eaa a AEE EEDE EE a AEE E E EET 6 7 CIRC CHIC UNG FA airea E E ene E E E E E E E S 6 10 Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 cccccccseeececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeeesaaneeesaeees 6 11 SPSCITVING DSSTIMAUOMN rrsan es ainen E aaa i d aaia aeaa ia EAT iiS 6 15 Choosing from the Address BOOK wii lt acssivsoeccnantacecseesanincece samtdeasisecevewerenaonstensacmelcandesauensmeadeasaencomnonteneden 6 15 Choosing DY ONE TOUCH KEY gecwccacewsssindantcwssunonanssiemedeteruten anian a a Eea E a Eia saaa EA Ea a aa 6 17 Entering a New E mall AGGleSS cwcicdsosmosnvends tnmaneiaads dankwiadb sab autdestadedeenstadaniesasbiamuntadebad iw ehededmmanctdarwachomantes 6 18 Specifying a New PC Folder ccc ccccccecccececnecceeeeceeecueecanecaueececeucecsuecseeseueesaeesaeesaeessueesaeesseessansseeesagess 6 19 CHECKING ANG Editing Destinations s sisien airaa E e ena eaobueacnsmobenedend 6 22 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending ccc
304. that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your computer Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation The details of the screens will vary in other versions of Windows NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges Checking What to Enter for Host Name Check the name of the destination computer 1 Display the window From the Start menu select Computer and then System Properties In Windows XP right click My Computer and select Properties The System Properties dialog box appears Click the Computer Name tab in the window that appears 2 Check the computer name Check the computer name in the window that appears If there is a workgroup Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name eee Change settings Full computer name Computer description Workgroup abcdnet All characters appearing in Full computer name should be entered in Host Name Example PC001 If there is a domain Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name LL Change settings Full computer name ens Computer description Domain abcdnet The characters to the left of the first dot in Full computer name should be entered in Host Name Example pc001 After checking the computer name click the E Close button to close the System Properties screen In Windows XP after checking the computer name click the Cancel butt
305. the document Scans all documents in full color Black amp White Scans all documents in black amp white Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 A A aie Select the copier s functions to use es ee ee E raper Da Zoom n Press Functions to display other functions Selection 5 Ga aS O Refer to Copying Functions on page 4 4 5 Duplex Combine gp Collate kaa 1 sided gt gt 1 sided Off On GBO0001_01 Copying gt Basic Operation 5 Entering the copy quantity ABC DEF NOTE Press the Clear key to change the copy quantity 6 Start copying Sta rt Press the Start key to start copying 4 3 Copying gt Copying Functions Copying Functions Copy screen shows the commonly used functions By pressing Functions other selectable functions will be shown as a list Use V or A to select the function What do you want to do Specify the paper size and type Reference Page Paper Selection gt page 3 41 Reduce or enlarge the original Zoom page 4 5 Adjust the density Density gt page 3 43 Copy on both sides of the paper Duplex gt page 4 7 Combine 2 or 4 originals into 1 sheet Combine gt page 4 10 Collate the output documents in page order Collate gt page 3 42 Specify the original size Original Size gt page 3 35 Specify the original orientation to scan
306. the network printing demands on Windows Macintosh and UNIX environments This expansion kit is also compatible with ThinPrint USB Keyboard A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on keyboards that are compatible with your MFP before you purchase one Appendix gt Optional Equipment Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Overview of the Applications The applications listed below are installed on this machine You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis UG 33 ThinPrint This application can only be activated in Europe This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver NOTE Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the application Starting Application Use Use the procedure below to start using an application NOTE If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login For this you need to login with administrator privileges Refer to Adding a User on page 9 36 for the default login user name and password 1 Display the screen Use V or AN to scroll up and down System Menu Counter a e Date Timer 2 5 5 1 T Adjustmen
307. the paper cannot be removed do not try to forcefully remove it Go to paper jam nside the Machine on page 10 24 Inside the Machine Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the machine A CAUTION Some parts are very hot inside the machine Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury SO T gm If most of the jammed paper is out in the inner tray grasp the paper and pull it out 10 24 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Fuser Cover AN Pam amp ee SSS a Les NI SES ESET If the jammed paper reaches the fuser unit as shown open the fuser cover grasp the paper and pull it out Registration Roller If the jammed paper does not reach the registration roller metal as shown grasp the paper and pull it out Ty lt I 4 Rear Feed Cover yi If the jammed paper is located inside the machine as shown open the rear feed cover and pull out the paper Duplex Unit If the jammed paper reaches the Duplex Unit as shown lift up the Duplex Unit and remove the paper 10 25 Troubleshooting gt Clearing Paper Jams Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor SD A Us 5 10 26 11 Appendix This chapter explains the following topics OO TO Mal TEQUIOII OTN serene ei E sb osceetmanetecaec E AEE EE saronesneal aoe aaenenesntiecsetoncecasencs 11 2 Overview of Opt
308. tination name Advanced search by type of registered destination E 001 Sales department 1 ab ee a derariment tabs 4 mail Folder SMB FTP or FAX 002 gt Support department 0234567 a __ 002 p Support department BOX Vv Use VM or AN to scroll up and down GB0428_01 e Displays details for individual destinations You can specify a destination by address number by pressing the Quick No Search key 6 29 sending gt Registering Destinations in the Address Book You can also press Menu to perform a more detailed search Ready to send 10 10 Address Book Contact IVITQ 001 pig Sales department 1 0123456 __ 001 Sales department 1 abc WW 002 Support department 0234567 c 1002 E Support department BOX em VY E E rad O o fe A i GB0428_01 EN 10 10 Narrow Down Search Name Search No Sort Name GB0396_00 Use V or AN to scroll up and down Narrow Down Advanced search by type of registered destination E mail Folder SMB FTP or FAX Search Name and Search No Searches by destination name or address number Sort Name and Sort No Sorts the list by destination name or address number NOTE To cancel a selection press the corresponding checkbox to clear the check mark 7 Accept the members Ready to send 10 10 Address Book Contact ly Q WV 001 fia Sales departmen
309. tion Guide GB0064_00 Enter the e mail address directly Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 WP Address Book Input 11 Limit 1 28 A Ext Address Book 1 gt 1 1 Address Entry 2 My Address GB0064_00 e Up to 128 characters can be entered Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters Uses the e mail address of the logged in user Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 W Address Book G Ext Address Book gt 1 1 a Address Entry gt 2 My Address GB0064_00 Cancel lt Back Next gt This setting is displayed when using user login administration Accept the destinations Press OK GB0057_05 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions File Name Entry Add a file name Additional information such as Job No and Date and Time can also be set You can check a job history or job status using the job name date and time or job number specified here 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen Copy Send Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 ee copes 1 EI E Is y eee File Name Entry uN Paper E Zoom il Density doc N selecti iat election fi a Priory Override A40 100 Normal 0 2 _ a es a GS Duplex Combine gp Collate ia gt 1 sided Off On GB0001_01 GB0002_03 Add Edi Shor
310. to 10 10 B a l 5 Manual 10 10 i B l e Press 1 to 5 Lighter Darker to adjust the background density GB0061_00 el e Al N a Oo GB0061_00 3 47 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions Zoom Scan to _ l USB Reduce or enlarge original to send or store size Reproduces the original size NOTE Adjust the image to match the send or store size Original Size page 3 35 Sending Size page 6 37 Storing Size page 7 13 and Zoom are related to each other Refer to Sending Size on page 6 37 and Storing Size on page 7 13 1 2 Display the screen 1 Referring to Using Various Functions on page 3 33 display the screen Ready to send 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Dest 0 Check i FAX TX Resolution Recall J U dpi 200x100dpi Normal fl Zoom K 100 One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book n 4 6 x Continuous Scan lt GB0055_00 1 2 S D Off h a File Name Entry Ww E mail Folder FAX doc s Functions vv Favorites Close Add Edi _ Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0081_03 Press Functions and then Zoom Select the function 10 10 100 Auto B L d GB0087_00 3 48 Common Operations gt Using Various Functions File Format USB Specify the image file format In addition you can adjust
311. to jam see the figure Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals If there is a gap readjust the original width guides The gap may cause the originals to jam Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last not first 3 12 Common Operations gt Checking the Equipment s Serial Number Checking the Equipment s Serial Number The equipment s serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX MFP MFP AC120V_ 60Hz _9 0A AC220 240V _50 60Hz_4 8 A MANUFACTURED MANUFACTURED NOTE You ll need the equipment s serial number when contacting your Service Representative Please check the number before contacting your Service Representative 3 13 Common Operations gt Checking the Counter Checking the Counter Check the number of pages printed and scanned 1 Display the screen 10 10 Se e Quick Setup Wizard j lt gt System Menu Counter Een 1 5 gt 2 Report n Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0054_00 2 Check the counter 10 10 Printed Pages Scanned Pages GB0584_00 Select the job you wish to check Printed Pages Copy B amp W Use V or AN to scroll up and down Copy Full Color 2 Copy Total Printer B amp W o GB0585_00 Scroll the screen to check the number of pages Pressing C
312. to send 10 10 Inputs f Limit 500 Subject Meeting 1 Body GB0088_01 GB0057_20 Cancel e t 4 Press OK 6 40 sending gt Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX Encrypt images when using FTP Encryption secures the document transmission NOTE To use FTP encryption set SSL to On in the Secure Protocol settings For details refer to Secure Protocol on page 9 22 4 Display the screen 2 1 Referring to Basic Operation on page 6 2 display the screen Ready to send _ 10 10 Ready to send 10 10 Ser l Dest 0 r j Recall Check eb E mail Subject Body a oe Job Finish Notice One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book _ 3 f A a A eh vee eee E mail Folder FAX VW 5 Ge e Sj Sj j y Favorites B Add Edi a Shortcut a Use V or AN to scroll up and down Select the function Ready to send 10 10 a a GB0091_00 6 41 sending gt WSD Scan WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD compatible computer NOTE To use WSD Scan confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network connected and WSD Scan page 9 27 is set to On in the network settings For information on operating the computer refer to the computer s help or the operation guide of your software Installing Driver Software for Windows 7 1 Display the window
313. toring originals Select the destination using either of the following methods e Address Book e Ext Address Book e Address Entry E mail e Address Entry Folder Color TIFF Compression Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine Value TIFF V6 TTN2 Default Screen Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key Value Destination Address Book Ext Address Book One Touch Setup Registration and User Management gt System Menu Favorites Application You can install and use applications that will make your day to day use of this machine more efficient Please contact your dealer or service representative information on applications Default Screen Description Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Favorites Application key Value Favorites Application Application 1 5 applications being used Application You can install activate deactivate and delete applications A list of installed applications is shown You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail You can install new applications You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail NOTE To install the applications insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB Port If Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files appears pr
314. tries are required Account Name Enter the account name up to 32 characters Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 Restriction This Prohibits printing scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 9 66 NOTE Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used Enter any other account ID 1 Display the screen 1 Referring to Job Accounting Settings on page 9 59 display the screen System Menu Counter 10 10 System Menu Counter Le 5 Accounting List AN DeTauIT Settung gt 1 1 5 mM N O a GB0461_01 we Use V or AN to scroll up and down 2 Enter the account information Account Name Inputg 1 Limit 32 N oO N LO oO a 0 Account ID 0 99999999 00000001 GB0479_00 el 9 62 Setup Registration and User Management gt Job Accounting 3 Check the settings Check the settings and change or add information as needed Account Name System Menu Counter 10 10 i Inputg Limit 32 Account ID 00000001 1 Print Total ff ff Print Full Color O d Refer to Character Entry Method on page 11 7 for details on entering characters X Account ID System Menu Counter 10 10 10 10 GB0480_00 Account Name Section 01 0 99999999 Account ID 00000001 00000001 1 2 Print Total Off 2 Print
315. ts size can be set Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box Value RAM Disk Setting Off On RAM Disk Size Setting range varies with Optional Memory settings After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Optional Memory Description Optional Memory When optional memory is installed select the memory allocation scheme based on the application in which you are using the equipment Value Printer Priority Normal Copy Priority After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON Date Timer Configures settings related to the date and time Description Date Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine If you perform Send as E mail the date and time set here will be displayed on the header Value Year 2000 to 2037 Month 1 to 12 Day 1 to 31 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 Date Format Select the display format of year month and date The year is displayed in Western notation Value Month Day Year Day Month Year Year Month Day Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT Choose the nearest listed location from the list Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time automatically reset settings and return to the default setting Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not Value Off On NOTE The time allowed to elapse before the pane
316. turally tends to curl after the package is opened When paper passes through the fixing unit it curls upward slightly To deliver flat printouts load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray Static electricity During printing paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together Whiteness Paper whiteness affects print contrast Use whiter paper for sharper brighter copies Quality Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not Square edges are rough sheets are uncut or edges or corners are crushed In order to prevent these problems be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself Packaging Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes Ideally the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture Specially treated paper We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper even if it conforms to the basic specifications When you use these kinds of paper purchase a small amount first as a sample to test e Glossy paper e Watermarked paper e Paper with an uneven surface e Perforated paper 11 13 Appendix gt Paper Special Paper This section describes printing onto special paper and print media The following paper and media can be used e Transparencies e Preprinted paper e Bond paper e Recycled paper
317. type Imaging Monotype Imaging retains all rights title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces except that you may make one backup copy You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces unless sooner terminated This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice from Monotype Imaging When this License expires or is terminated you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested You agree that you will not modify alter disassemble decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the Software Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging published specifications and the diskette will be free from
318. ument Box on page 7 8 amp Start printing Start Press the Start key to start printing Remove the USB memory For details refer to Removing USB Memory on page 7 7 Document Box gt Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine You can store files in PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS format 1 Place the originals For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 10 Q N 2 Plug the USB memory Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot When the message Removable Memory is recognized Displaying files Are you sure is displayed press Yes Q IMPORTANT Use USB memory formatted by this machine If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used The removable memory is not formatted may appear Refer to Check of Device Status on page 8 12 3 Display the screen Document Box 10 10 BA asc Gp cH gt Gp IK gt I Cancel Print When the machine reads the USB memory Removable Memory screen may appear NOTE If the screen does not appear press the Document Box key and then Removable Memory GB0089_00 l 5 Document Box gt Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 4 Select the folder 10 10 10 10 4 3 A 6 J 3 7 9 2 1PG cm 41 25 gt 1 1 GB0089_03 3 Store File GB0089_00 Select Al
319. unctions and then Job Finish Notice Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Copies ae ie L J Paper i Zoom ll Density m Selection Lm MZ 100 a ee r Combine La g Collate 1 sided gt 1 sided Off On Normal 0 G Duplex GB0001_01 2 Select the function 10 10 En l GB0063_00 3 Select the destination Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Background Density Adj A sss Continuous Scan ea 2 Job Finish Notice c gt Close Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down GB0002_02 Ready to copy Full Color 1 1 ae GB0938_00 Select an e mail address from the address book Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 bai Address Book A Ext Address Book 1 gt gt 4 4 1 lt gt Address Entry 2 My Address gt el GB0064_00 Searches by destination name Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 Q gt aaa abc com bbb abc com ony S44 ccc ccc abc com a ddd abc com Gaw 10 4 GB0398_00 Allows you to search for and sort destinations Displays details for individual destinations Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 4 Select the e mail address from an external address book 10 10 bal Address Book E Ext Address Book 1 1 Address Entry gt 2 My Address e For details on the External Address Book refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Opera
320. vesmiehenkatu 4 FI 00880 Helsinki Phone 358 9 4780 5200 Fax 358 9 4780 5390 www kyoceramita fi FRANCE KYOCERA MITA France S A Espace Technologique de St Aubin Route de l Orme FR 91195 Gif sur Yvette CEDEX Phone 33 1 6985 2600 Fax 33 1 6985 3409 www kyoceramita fr GERMANY KYOCERA MITA Deutschland GmbH Otto Hahn Str 12 D 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 918 O Fax 49 2159 918 100 www kyoceramita de ITALY KYOCERA MITA Italia S P A Via Verdi 89 91 l 20063 Cernusco sul Naviglio MI Phone 39 02 921 791 Fax 39 02 921 796 00 www kyoceramita it THE NETHERLANDS KYOCERA MITA Nederland B V Beechavenue 25 1119 RA Schiphol Rijk Phone 31 20 587 7200 Fax 31 20 587 7260 www kyoceramita nl NORWAY KYOCERA MITA Norge Olaf Helsetsvei 6 NO 0694 Oslo Phone 47 22 627 300 Fax 47 22 627 200 www kyoceramitanorge no PORTUGAL KYOCERA MITA Portugal LDA Rua do Centro Cultural 41 PT 1700 106 Lisboa Phone 351 21 843 6780 Fax 351 21 849 3312 www kyoceramita pt SOUTH AFRICA KYOCERA MITA South Africa Pty Ltd 527 Kyalami Boulevard Kyalami Business Park ZA 1685 Midrand Phone 27 11 540 2600 Fax 27 11 466 3050 www kyoceramita co za SPAIN KYOCERA MITA Espana S A Avda Manacor No 2 ES 28290 Las Matas Madrid Phone 34 91 631 83 92 Fax 34 91 631 82 19 www kyoceramita es SWEDEN KYOCERA MITA Svenska AB Esbogatan 16B SE 164 75 Kista P
321. y to copy Full Color 10 10 a a 3 55 GB0069_00 Ready to copy Full Color 10 10 File Name Entry E gt Priority Override GB0001_01 GB0002_03 Add Edi Shortcut Use V or AN to scroll up and down Print from USB Common Operations gt Using Various Functions 3 56 4 Copying This chapter explains the following topics BASIC OPTAN oraa e E E E E E E tonshsanatadsnedees sds senteamaduaunatetassaettare 4 2 GIP NG FUNGUO aerer e rE E r E E T E ER 4 4 LOO e E E E vous T A E E pe neeaeteh 4 5 B Ure Co A A A E E E E EE E E EA E E AE A E A E E I A A E 4 7 COTTON Sasi eaactaroart case E E naveca va ones vcnnasuntouae uanewntine wears atacean saieuactst oman eenvonesenssaanavaen tee 4 10 BVI Ea E A EE chess ctr crc rat E A vse NE E N E E E E E EE E E NE 4 13 PAS AGUS MEN see E E E S E E E 4 14 Sale deel ne E E E E E A S A E A EN E E E E TE E A A EN 4 15 SAUA WON see E vee panna E A E E E E E A 4 16 4 1 Copying gt Basic Operation Basic Operation 1 Press the Copy key Co m py NOTE If the touch panel is turned off press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 O For details refer to Loading Originals on page 3 10 N 3 Selecting color mode Auto P Color Full Color Full Color Black amp White 4 Selecting the functions Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a document is color or black amp white and then scans
322. ype of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine e Do not use envelopes with certain special features For example do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film covered window e If paper jams occur load fewer envelopes at once Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray fan it and align the edges Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams NOTE If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading edge raised a few millimeters Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 11 In addition the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing up to 200 C or 392 F Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 11 The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing It must be resistant to silicone oil as well Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars 11 16 Append

KYOCERA FS FS-C2526MFP

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents